JP6593253B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  It relates to pachinko machines.

  As a recent pachinko game machine, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, The mainstream is pachinko gaming machines that transition to the state and can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface to obtain a large number of prize balls. Within the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, there is a probability-changing gaming state that increases the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and a time-reducing gaming state that increases the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery There is also a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player by these game states. There is also a gaming machine that enhances the fun of the game by performing an effect in accordance with the game progress state.

JP 2005-31274 A JP 2011-45518 JP 2013-146407 A Japanese Patent Publication No. 6-44940 Japanese Patent No. 4205040

  However, since there are many such gaming machines, there is a problem that it is desired to develop a model that can realize further innovative gaming properties.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A main game start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a main game start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) that can be displaced in an open state or a closed state, When a game ball can enter the main game start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than the closed state, and is displaced into the closed state A variable member (for example, a structure in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter in the main game start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) as compared with the open state or the open state). , The second main game start opening electric accessory B11d),
A game entrance where a game ball can enter (for example, a general winning entrance P10),
A fixing member (for example, a ball entry adjusting member Y10) attached to the ball entrance (for example, a general game port P10) that reduces the ease of entering a game ball into the ball entrance (for example, the general game port P10). When,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the main game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying the auxiliary game identification information;
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering a main game start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10);
Main game content determination means for determining whether or not the main game is random and determining a stop display mode of the main game identification information and a variable display mode of the main game identification information based on the result of the determination When,
According to the determination by the main game content determination means, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) displays the main game identification information variably. Main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display of the main game identification information after,
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous for the player until a predetermined period of time elapses,
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
After the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) based on the ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the auxiliary game identification information,
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the easy entry ball for executing the easy entry game that can change the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state. Game execution means;
A special game state having a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the main game start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10) than the normal game state. And easy entry game state control means that can be controlled to be in a specific game state after the execution of
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
As the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), at least a predetermined effect and a specific effect with different effect contents can be displayed.
When a game ball enters the entrance (for example, the general winning entrance P10) in a state where the normal game state is not being executed and the special game is not executed, the predetermined effect is not executed, and It is configured to execute the specific effect,
When a game ball enters a ball entrance (for example, a general winning port P10) in a situation where the game is in a normal game state and a special game is being executed, the predetermined effect is executed, and It is configured not to execute the specific performance,
In a situation where the game is in a specific game state, when a game ball enters a ball entrance (for example, a general winning port P10), the predetermined effect is not executed, and the specific effect is not executed. And
When the specific effect is being executed based on the fact that the execution condition of the specific effect is satisfied by the entrance of the game ball into the entrance in a situation where the game is in a normal game state and no special game is executed. The execution of the specific effect is satisfied again when the game ball enters the entrance, and the specific effect is re-executed from the beginning. Pachinko machine.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, the game machine adopting the concept of executing an effect in accordance with the game progress state can realize further innovative gaming properties.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of prefetch effect execution determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is an effect content determination table configuration diagram on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an opening pattern of the big winning opening on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the start demonstration time control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a start demonstration effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a front view of a gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is an operation diagram relating to the second grand prize opening C20 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the upper shielding member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the lower shielding member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entrance determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the small hit game related display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 64 is an operational diagram related to winning in the V winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the symbol display process on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the special game is completed on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of limited frequency end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a front view of a gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 90 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the small hit-related short time end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of a small hitting related short time end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a table relating to external terminal transmission contents on the main control board side in a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a table relating to external terminal transmission contents on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 103 shows an example of the electric accessory release time applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 104 is an example of a case where a small win is won in the final variation of the time-saving gaming state applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 105 is an example of a notice effect applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 106 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the shielding member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 111 is an operation diagram when a special game is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of opening / closing timing control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the first main game big hit effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 116 is an operation diagram when a special game is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 117 is an image diagram of the first main game big hit effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the small hitting related short time termination determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 128 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 137 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating an example of the opening pattern of the special winning opening on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 143 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 144 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 145 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 146 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the small hit game related display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is an image diagram of the temporary stop extension period of the decorative symbols on the first main gaming symbol side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 150 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 151 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 152 is an image view of a general winning opening peripheral board surface in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 153 is a front view of a magnetic sensor arrangement in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 154 is an image diagram of the side surface of the magnetic sensor arrangement in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 155 is an operation diagram related to the monitoring period of the magnetic sensor in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 156 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 157 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 158 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 159 is a flowchart of the general winning opening entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 160 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 161 is a flowchart of the effect display control process at the time of entering on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, for example, numbers, letters, designs. The thing with the shape of etc. can be mentioned. In this specification, “identification information” may be called a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (design), but the “special symbol (special symbol)” is the main control board. The “decorative pattern (design)” is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. “Displaying identification information” is not limited to a display method. For example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only whether light is emitted but also a color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on a reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Direction” refers to display content that enhances the fun of the game. For example, identification information fluctuates / stops, notices, etc., moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photos, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. “Open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general big prize opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = non-winning state Easy state. Also, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as advance state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as retreat state) In a configuration (so-called velo-type attacker) that can take the following condition, the advance state = easy-to-win state and the evacuation state = non-easy state of winning. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, and the like, and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). “Game state” means, for example, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-stochastic game state in which a lottery probability for transition to a special game state or a special game state in which a special winning opening can be in an open state is a predetermined value. A probabilistic variable gaming state with a high lottery probability, an auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning at the starting port that becomes a lottery opportunity for special games (so-called normal symbol short-time state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In such a case, the variable member may be one or a combination of a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery. “Estimated average execution time of easy-to-play games per unit time” is assumed to be a situation in which there is a constant change in the auxiliary game symbol (for example, there is always a hold related to the auxiliary game symbol). In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the start port. In terms of internal processing, in other words, for example, When a variable member is attached to the start port, the length of the variable member opening period (so-called open extension function activated / non-actuated state), the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member is won High or low probability (so-called ordinary figure high-probability lottery state / low-probability lottery state), normal pattern (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of variable members Condensation function inoperative state, operating state) is realized by any one or more combinations of the like. The “average value of the variation display period of identification information” is not limited to the meaning of measuring the variation display period for each variation display of identification information and taking the average value based on the actual measurement value. More specifically, when the variable display period is determined for each variable display of the identification information, and there are multiple types of variable display periods to be determined (selected), , The expected value based on the plurality of types of variable display periods (the sum of “selection probability × variable display period”). If there is one type of variable display period to be selected, one type The variable display period itself is (that is, includes both concepts). Furthermore, the concept limited to only the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information at the time of loss, the concept limited to only the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information at the time of hit, or only the variable display period with the highest selection probability In other words, it is possible to supplement the fact that the meaning of this wording is to be used as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that can be experienced by the player. As a method of realizing different "average values", the variable display period candidates and / or selection probabilities are changed, or even if the variable display period candidates and / or selection probabilities are the same, a further variable display period is added. There are various methods such as changing the period value when doing this, but it is not limited to any method). “The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is different from the first period. "At least having a variable period state" means not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states) For example, the state transition of “first variation period state” → “second variation period state” → “third variation period state” is made according to the number of times of display of the identification information. Including those that can be taken. In this case, when the average value of the variation display period of the identification information in each state is configured as “first variation period state” <“second variation period state” <“third variation period state”, It is possible to construct a state transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state {Of course, the reverse state transition (game progress state) may be constructed, In that case, it is suitable when used in combination with a probability variation gaming state that lasts until the next big hit + an electric-chu specific gaming state (in spite of the situation where the next big hit occurrence is deterministic or likely to be a big hit) As the situation where the next big hit is not obtained continues, the progress speed of the game is improved, so there is a case where the so-called malaise can be wiped out)}. Furthermore, as a feature of each state, in the “first variation period state”, the difference between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is “ In the “third variation period state”, which is smaller than the difference in the “second variation period state”, the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit In addition to the difference being smaller than that in the “second variation period state”, the identification information variation display period is likely to be relatively long compared to the “first variation period state” (particularly in the event of a loss) In other words, in the “second variation period state”, the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is relatively long compared to other states. (I.e., the fluctuation display period for short fluctuations where the loss is deterministic (or easy to select) and the fluctuation display period for medium fluctuations suggesting a hit are not selected (or difficult to select), but reach fluctuations) It can be exemplified that it has a feature that only the variable display period (per long fluctuation) is selected (or easily selected)}. The “specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game” may be a period from immediately after the end of the execution of the special game until a predetermined number of symbol changes are made. It may be a period from the time when one or more symbol changes are made after the execution of the game until a predetermined number of symbol changes are made (that is, the high probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is completed) If it is within the range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within the range, so the aforementioned “first variation period state” → “second variation period state” → “third variation period state” The specific period may mean the stay period of the “first variation period state” and / or the “second variation period state”. “When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the information regarding the hold” means, for example, that there is a high possibility that a special game (so-called big hit game) will occur at the time of the hold-up, but there is a possibility that a special game will occur There are no particular limitations on the criteria. More specifically, “winning random number (random number for success / failure lottery)”, “variation mode determination random number” for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, “symbol determination random number” for determining the stop symbol, Random values such as “hit symbol determination random numbers” that determine whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game may be used as a criterion for judgment, and event contents derived from these random values (results of success / failure determination) The length of the variation time, the type of stop symbol, whether or not to shift to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the judgment criteria. “Suggesting or notifying the presence of a hold” means, for example, an effect at the time of the on-hold digestion until reaching the hold (a design variation mode of a decorative design, or in conjunction with it) In the case of notification, for example, a display mode of a holding indicator lamp (which may be an image on a liquid crystal display device) at the time of occurrence of the holding Is changed (in that case, the display color is changed, the display shape is changed, etc.), the sound such as the on-hold sound or BGM is changed at the time of the on-hold occurrence, and the effect lamp at the time of the on-hold occurrence Changing the lighting mode of the (frame lamp, etc.), or executing mode of other effects (decoration pattern of the decorative pattern, background effects, etc. performed in conjunction with it) executed at the time of the hold occurrence The To reduction, and the like.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . This embodiment is merely an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modification examples should not be construed as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of one embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of a modification and another modification is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. In addition, in this example, the term “table” is not limited to the format, and one or a plurality of selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or a plurality of information. It should be understood that this is an associated mode. Furthermore, numerical values (for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.) as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications are as follows: This is only an example, and in particular, under different conditions (for example, according to the conditions of the first main game side and the second main game side, according to the conditions of the probability variation game and the non-probability variation game, and the time reduction game It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in the conditions for time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, on the first main game side and the second main game side, the magnitude relationship between the winning probability at the time of the lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is as follows: first main game side = second main game side Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be changed as appropriate so that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side, etc. Good (same for other values and conditions). In addition, for example, when configuring the probability variation gaming state based on the intention to continue until the next jackpot occurs, whether to set “65535” as the number of continuations (configure to be substantially continued), Or, even in the options of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next jackpot occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples Should be understood as appropriate.

  Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines mainly consist of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball dish D20, a lower ball dish D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably storing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 through a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball tray D20 and the lower ball tray D22, and a sound effect corresponding to the gaming state or the like is output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, the game area D30 includes a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown), various general winning ports, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, production display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are provided apart from each other, and the game flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured to be easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but not easily guided to the second main game start port B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the first main game start port A10, but is easily guided to the second main game start port B10. . It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the electric combination is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric combination is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are spaced apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 The two main game start openings B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other. In that case, the upper part of the second main game start opening B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game start opening A10. May be.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game balls flowing down the right side and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) can be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. {However, the present invention is not limited to this. A game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the left side of the game area D30 (the center of the game area is The game ball flowing down the standard) may be configured not to be guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10}.

  Next, a first grand prize winning port C10 and a second grand prize winning port C20 are provided above the out port D36, and a game ball that flows down to the right side or the left side (based on the center of the game region) of the game region D30. Is configured so as to easily pass through the region where the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out mouth D36.

  Next, the first grand prize winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located above D36. Specifically, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1) The first prize winning solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable in a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode (so-called, a state in which the bar-like member provided in the big prize opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted with respect to the player side) (Bello-type attacker) or an opening on a passage where a game ball can roll is used as a large winning opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above the opening D36. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening C20 are configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable in a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode (so-called, a state in which the bar-like member provided in the big prize opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted with respect to the player side) (Bello-type attacker) or an opening on a passage where a game ball can roll is used as a large winning opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of losing {but not limited to this, a 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have an effect role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, in the case of adopting a technique that does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) by giving the first main gaming symbol (second main gaming symbol) itself an effect role, an effect described later You may comprise so that a 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display like display apparatus SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 where an effect is executed including a variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying. The effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, but may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in a game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with the prize winning to the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each prize opening, A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 and the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) in the upper ball tray D20 To region D30 A launching device D42 that launches each ball, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and a switch that turns on / off the pachinko gaming machine The power switch Ea and the like are provided on the back of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling execution of the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that performs display processing such as a decorative symbol change display / stop display and a hold display or a notice display on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.) is installed. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1st prize winning opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize winning prize winning detection apparatus C21s, general winning detection apparatus (not shown, the general winning entry is a winning entry with a winning ball but no symbol lottery. }, A drive solenoid (not shown) (the above-mentioned first big prize opening electric combination solenoid C13, second big prize opening electric combination solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to an input / output device that is indispensable to control the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) related to performance / game progress can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal. The game-related information can be output from an external device to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball rental request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device). Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, the sub-control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols and the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown) as described above. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Lighting) The lighting control of the lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that space is merited and noise is mixed into the wiring or the like by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the performance is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that performs payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control part SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control part SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In the following description, each means included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each means (device) will be described below.

  The “random number” in the claims and the present specification is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “0” to “ The value is randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “255”. The random number may not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo-random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the value is expressed in order along the random number sequence (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value) ) With a contingent value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like.

  In addition, the limited frequency means that the type and / or selection rate of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed is the change rate of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (limited frequency state) different from the type and / or selectivity.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes first and second main game symbol variation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counters) that can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game start port electric player release timer MP22t-B that measures the drive (release) time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. is doing. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c that measures winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a probability variation number counter MP51c capable of counting the probability variation number, and a time reduction number counter MP52c capable of counting the time variation number. Here, the “specific game” means, for example, a probability variation game in which a lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in a normal game or a time shortening game in which the variation time of a main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in a normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) compared to during the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10 is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the number of changes in the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may have a function of performing a lottery transition from a specific game (for example, a probability-change game or a time-reduced game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time a symbol changes. Good (so-called pachinko machines with a falling lottery function). Note that the time-reduced gaming state according to this example may be that the main game short time flag is on, or the auxiliary game short time flag may be on, that is, the time shortened gaming state. May indicate that the opening time extension function is activated, or the non-time-reduced gaming state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not activated. The time-reduced gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time-reducing gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control unit SM include the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the result of the game. It concerns only the display of information that has no effect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second grand prize opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of supporting the above.

  Here, the equipment variation time management timer SM21t is configured to time the decoration symbol variation time.

  Next, the stay stage management counter SM23c is configured to count how many times the main game symbol has changed in the specific game state from the end of the special game in order to switch the effect stage. In addition, the consecutive resort number counter SM23c2 is configured to count the number of times that a big hit is won continuously during a specific game that continues.

  Next, the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c is configured to manage the progress status of the hold prefetch effect when the hold prefetch effect is executed over a plurality of variations of the main game symbol.

  The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 includes a decoration symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decoration symbol, and a first hold display portion SG12 (and a second hold display portion SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  Next, FIG. 4 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after the game machine is turned on and initialized (not shown), the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and resets the power supply unit E reset button ( It is determined whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of clearing the contents of the RAM has been intentionally performed by a game hall manager or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, stored in the checksum and RAM area recorded at the time of power interruption) Compared to the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is not backed up in the RAM). To do. If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the data backed up in the RAM in step 1010 is normal, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the CPUMC of the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M in step 1012. In step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the timing, or the command is set at the timing and will be described later. The control command transmission process may be used for transmission), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers a scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in FIG. 11 is executed), the processing in step 1018 is performed. Transition. After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. . Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the CPUMC of the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs a prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening where the game ball has won. The winning ball payout control board KH is executed, and processing for managing the result is executed. Next, in step 1998, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes output processing of external signals (information output to the external terminal board, the hall computer H, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit SM side), and immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the power is turned off in the gaming machine, the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (NMI interrupt in this example), in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets power-off information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. . Next, in step 1022, the CPU MC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 5 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H <b> 10 (inflow, in the case of a gate). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the holding ball in the form of temporarily storing the random number in the RAM area of the main control board M together with information on how many are being held, The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). In addition, also when No in step 1102 and step 1104, it transfers to the following process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric-powered object releasing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (the flag state of the auxiliary gaming short time flag) and the acquired auxiliary gaming side gaming state and Determine the stop symbol based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the holding ball (for example, when the auxiliary game short flag is on, select the winning symbol with a higher probability than when it is off) Temporarily store in M RAM area.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, there are “D0, D1, D2” as the stop symbols, and “D1, D2” as the stop symbols as the winning symbols. In the non-time-reduced game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the open mode is (0.2 seconds open → closed), and the open mode of the electric combination that will be opened is stopped. When the symbol is “D2”, the release mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → opened for 5.0 seconds, closed) (longest open). In the time-saving game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the release mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed). When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → close). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol “D0” during non-time-reduced games, and the stop symbol is likely to be a winning symbol “D1” during time-reduced games.

  Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol change time to the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game short time flag is on and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer. After starting MP11t-H, the auxiliary game symbol display on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g is started.

  Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol and confirms and displays the acquired stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. To do. In step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “winning” (D1 · D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens based on the winning symbol on the auxiliary game side (for example, in the case of the winning symbol “D1”, it is opened for 1 second → closed for 1 second) -> Open for 1 second-> Close for 1 second-> Open for 1 second-> Open in which it is closed. In the case of the winning symbol "D2," open for 0.2 seconds, close for 0.8 seconds, open for 5 seconds) The predetermined time concerning the opening time (opening and closing time) of the electric accessory is set. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric-powered object releasing flag. In step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game electric accessory B11d in the second main game start port B10. Next, in step 1238, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game short time flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1239, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1239, in step 1240, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the information indicating that the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is started. An opening start command is set, and the process proceeds to step 1242. In the present embodiment, when the main game time short flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is the predetermined hit symbol (D2), the time for which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is kept open is the longest. Has been.

  Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in steps 1244 and 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10 and sets the electric accessory open flag. Turn off. Next, in step 1248, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command for ending the longest opening of the electric accessory to the sub side, which is information indicating that the longest opening of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d has ended. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If No in Step 1202, the process proceeds to Step 1242. If No in Step 1204, the process proceeds to Step 1224. In this case, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to shift to the next process after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing a branch process using a fixed stop display flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port entrance information has been received from the first main game start port entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start port A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls relating to the main game (especially the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning lottery random number for determining whether or not to win, a symbol lottery random number for determining a winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for obtaining are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired (holding occurrence command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

  Next, at step 1312, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start port entrance information from the second main game start port entrance detection device B <b> 11 s of the second main game start port B <b> 10. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls relating to the main game (especially the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the first main game content determination means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the random determination random number for the first main game and the acquisition lot random number for the second main game) Are set the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired (pending occurrence command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and shift to the next process (process of step 1400). In the case of No in step 1302 and step 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312. In the case of No in step 1312 and step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

  In this embodiment, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in Step 1310 and Step 1320. However, the information on the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. The number of reservations may be attached and transmitted, and it can be substituted as information indicating that a random number has been acquired using these pieces of information.

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms whether there is no second main game symbol hold. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process to be described later, and the next process {the process of steps 1400 (1) and (2). }. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {steps 1400 (1), (2). The process proceeds to.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (but it is based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is that the special game is not being played (or the condition device is being operated), the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, in the case of providing a variable fixed time (time for displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is displayed), during the variable fixed time, You may comprise so that it may not satisfy | fill.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M in step 1405 and step 1406. The second main game content determination random number) is read, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is stored. Shift (hold digestion process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol determination lottery based on the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number). To do.

  Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game success / failure lottery table (second main game success / failure lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-stochastic varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols related to the main game symbol are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “4A, 5A, 7A” and “4B, 5B, 7B”) are selected. One main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of special game rounds determined with reference to the main game symbol is 8R for 4A, 4B, 5A, and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lose symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. May} In the present embodiment, the average number of rounds per jackpot on the second main game side (8R × 700/1024 + 16R × 324/1024 = 10.5R) than the average round number on the first main game side (8R × 700/1024 + 16R × 324/1024 = 10.5R) 8R x 400/1024 + 16R x 624/1024 = 12.9R), so one symbol variation on the second main game side is more advantageous than one symbol variation on the first main game side It has become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the average number of rounds for jackpots related to the first main game side and the average number of rounds for jackpots related to the second main game side may be configured identically. Also, the average number of rounds actually executed is the same for the first main game side jackpot and the second main game side jackpot, but the actual round number average value is the second main game side jackpot. You may comprise so that one may become larger than the big hit by the side of the 1st main game. Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds in which a game ball can easily enter the game until reaching the specified count that will close the grand prize opening when it is opened for a long time (for example, 20 seconds or more). Actually, it is a special game of 15 rounds, but if the opening for a long time (for example, 20 seconds or more) is 8 rounds and the opening for a short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is 7 rounds, The actual round number of special games is 8 rounds. In this example, the big hit symbol is described as 4A, 4B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B, but for example, 7A is not limited to one that shows only one type of big hit symbol. For example, there is no problem if the 7A group is interpreted as having a plurality of jackpot symbols such as 7A-1, 7A-2, 7A-3,... 7A-20. Further, the larger the random number for selecting a symbol, the greater the number of symbols in the group. Specifically, the random number range for selecting 4A is 300, and the random number range for selecting 5A is Since it is 400, you may comprise so that there may be more types of designs which 5A has than types of designs which 4A has. In such a case, a big hit symbol such as 4A may be referred to as a 4A group. Such a concept is applicable to all the embodiments in this example.

  Next, in step 1411, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1411, in other words, in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation / non-time-reduced gaming state), in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol result lottery result Based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, Control goes to step 1414.

  Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in this example, the present embodiment is configured such that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the result of lottery determination of the main game symbol. That is, when the result of the main game symbol is a winning lottery, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is easily determined. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the main game table 3 is not configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls, but is configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. It goes without saying. Furthermore, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game short time flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol on the second main game side When the variation is configured to be advantageous for the player, the second main game side is likely to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, in other words, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, in step 1450, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1413, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1414. Moreover, you may comprise so that the process of step 1413 may be performed immediately after becoming Yes in step 1420 (timing at which the change time ended).

  Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbols temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and A command related to the current gaming state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side). To be sent). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the main game symbol variation time in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), according to the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1420.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

  Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command for transmitting information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit SM side to the effect that the symbol variation ends. It is set in the buffer MT10 (sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) The main game symbol variation display on B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

  Next, in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter. In addition, in this example, it is comprised so that it may transfer to a specific game state (the process of a probability variation game state with a frequency | count limitation and a time reduction game state) after completion of the special game which concerns on all the jackpot symbols. Next, in step 1440, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). Even in the case of No in step 1420, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c and determines whether or not the counter value G is a value within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 50). In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination, and performs the next processing (step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 12 (limited frequency table 1) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (80 ≧ G> 50). In addition, the table referred by the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side is the same content. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hitting is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. In addition, compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to have the shortest average variation time. The limited frequency table 1 is configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in step 1456, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is a value within the second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol based on the main game random number, the result of lottery determination, and the number of reserved balls on the second main game side. ) And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 12 (limited frequency table 2) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 2 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (50 ≧ G> 10). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hitting is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. The limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average variation time as compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3. Further, the limited frequency table 2 is configured such that the average variation time is shorter when there are two or three reserved balls than when there are zero or one reserved balls.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1456, in other words, if the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the third stage range (10 ≧ G), in step 1460, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game side random number. Based on the lottery result, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 12 (limited frequency table 3) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is within a predetermined range (10 ≧ G). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. In addition, the variation time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3 is only one type, and is constant regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls.

  Note that the content of the limited frequency table is not limited to this, and the content of the limited frequency table to be referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side is only in a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). You may comprise so that it may become the same. Further, in a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of reserves (both on the first main game side and the second main game side). Otherwise, the first main game side selects a variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of holds, and on the second main game side, if the number of holds is a predetermined number or more, the number of holds It is desirable that the variation time be relatively shorter than when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  In this embodiment, there are three types of limited frequency tables, and the configuration is such that the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3 are switched in three stages in this order (so-called three-stage ST). However, there is no problem even if the number of types of the limited frequency tables is changed and the order of the tables to be referenced is changed. Furthermore, there are two tables, a limited frequency table 1 and a limited frequency table 2, and the table to be referenced is switched in the order of the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 1 as a three-stage ST mode. Also good.

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c. In the case of Yes in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag and proceeds to step 1510. Note that if the answer is No in step 1502 or 1506, the process proceeds to step 1510.

  Next, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). Note that if the answer is No in step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short flag / auxiliary game short flag). Next, in step 1556, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1600). In the case of No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in steps 1604 and 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets information to start a special game (special game start display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1602, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. In the case of No in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the special game permission has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is immediately before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, when it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that keeps opening, a pattern that opens and closes). To do. Next, in step 1616, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first big prize opening electric accessory C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). The first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is opened, the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1612, that is, when the big prize opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614 to 1620.

  Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) is assigned to the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly, the opening time timer) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) relating to the opening of the big prize opening. It is determined whether or not elapses. Also in the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. In the case of No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). Is stopped and the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). . If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information indicating that the special game is to be ended (special game end display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit SM side. Set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1930). In step 1650, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Even in the case of No in step 1634, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 80 times) in the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 25, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described. First, FIG. 17 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting when the gaming machine is powered on. That is, when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clearing). When the information is received → The sub-side RAM is initialized, when various information commands are received → The production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub-side RAM). Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (f) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (f) is executed, as shown in the processing of (f) in the figure, first, in step 2050, the CPUSC of the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM determines the stay stage described later. Execute the decision process. Next, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a hold information management process to be described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decoration symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a display command transmission control process (transmits the command set in the series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and ends the repetitive processing routine. To do.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a form in which the sub-main routine (S2050 to S2900) is loop-processed after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 9E is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is sent to one terminal (in this example) of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM. , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (e). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sends a command input port (described above) from the main control board M side. Check the data signal line input port). In step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before this interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the specific game has started on the main side (in this example, a transition is made to the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state). In the case of Yes in Step 2052, in Step 2054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets an initial value (for example, 1) to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2056, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the specific game execution flag, and proceeds to step 2066.

  Here, the specific game running flag is a flag indicating a specific game (for example, a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state, so-called ST), and is turned on when the specific game starts. The jackpot or stay stage management counter SM23c is turned off when the value exceeds an upper limit (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of STs).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2052, in step 2058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific game has ended {for example, determined by referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, or staying Determine whether the value of the stage management counter SM23c exceeds an upper limit value (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of STs)}. In the case of Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets (zero clears) the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2062, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the specific game execution flag. Next, in step 2064, the CPUSC of the sub control board S counts the consecutive game count counter SM23c2 (a counter that counts the number of consecutive big hits during a specific game, and the value is added in the processing of step 2410 described later. ) Is reset (cleared to zero), and the process proceeds to Step 2066. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2058, the process proceeds to Step 2066.

  Next, in step 2066, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific game execution flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2066, in step 2068, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol has been newly stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2068, in step 2070, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c (increment), and proceeds to step 2072. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2068, the process proceeds to step 2072 without executing the process in step 2070.

  Next, in step 2072, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value is a value (1 to 30) within the first range. In the case of Yes in step 2072, in step 2074, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets “short effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stores in the RAM area of the sub-control board S) and performs the next process (in step 2100). Process).

  On the other hand, if No in Step 2072, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c in Step 2076, and whether or not the counter value is a value within the second range (31 to 70). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2076, in step 2078, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “long effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stores in the RAM area), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). .

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2076, in step 2080, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is a value within the third range (71 to 80). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2080, in step 2082, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “fixed effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stores in the RAM area), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). . Note that if the answer is No in steps 2066 and 2080 (for example, when the game is not in a specific game), the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2100).

  In the present embodiment, the third stage (fixed production stage) is only one type (5 seconds in this example) and one type of production content (in this example, prefetching) regardless of the result of the lottery. Although the display contents differ at the time of non-prefetching, the system is only a fixed time effect), but a plurality of variation modes and effect contents may be provided. In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the number of types of production contents in the third stage is smaller than that in the second stage (long production stage). As the tendency, it is desirable that the number of types of both the variation pattern and the production content is “second stage> first stage> third stage”.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the stay stage for determining the content of the effect based on the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c that counts the number of symbol fluctuations during the specific game.

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new electric accessory longest opening start command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in other words, when the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is started, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the electric agent longest open flag. Turn on and go to step 2110. On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new electric accessory longest release end command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2106, in other words, when the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is completed, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the electric utility accessory longest open flag. The process proceeds to step 2110. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2106, the process proceeds to step 2110.

  Here, the longest open flag of the electric accessory is the period during which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened in the release mode in which the time for which the second main game starting opening B11d is continuously opened is the longest (longest open). Is used to determine that the hold generated when the longest open flag of the electric accessory is on is based on the entry of the game ball that is being opened for the longest time. Is a flag. In the present embodiment, the longest open flag of the electric accessory is turned on only in the non-time-saving game.

  Next, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it has received a new hold occurrence command (hold information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the drawing suspension counter (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game and a maximum of four for the second main game). 1 "is added (incremented). Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, and holds the hold information (in particular, a random value related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, a lottery decision) Random numbers, design lottery random numbers, and variation mode lottery random numbers) are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

  Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the longest open electric utility flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2116, in step 2118, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S is a hold on the second main game side. . In the case of Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S indicates that the hold information newly stored temporarily in the RAM area of the sub-control board S is a hold that occurred at the time of the longest release of the electric accessory. The information is added, and the process proceeds to Step 2122. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2116 or step 2118, the process proceeds to step 2122 without executing the process of step 2120.

  Next, in step 2122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S pre-determines the success / failure result of each hold based on the hold information (particularly, the lottery random number) stored temporarily in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a holding that is a winning (big hit) among the holdings that are consumed before the new holding based on the result of the prior determination. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2124, in step 2150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a pre-reading effect execution determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2142. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124, the process proceeds to step 2142 without executing the process in step 2150. Next, in step 2142, the CPUSC of the sub control board S makes full use of the effect display means SS on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display portion SG12 and the second hold display portion SG13). The same number of on-hold display lamps as the counter value are turned on and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2110, in step 2130, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2130, in step 2132, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing suspension counter. Next, in step 2134, the CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts the holding information related to the symbol variation to the remaining holding information.

  Next, in step 2136, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the digested hold is a hold that occurred when the electric utility object is fully opened. In the case of Yes in step 2136, in step 2138, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the longest open time reservation permission permission flag, and proceeds to step 2140. On the other hand, if No in step 2136, the process proceeds to step 2140 without executing the process in step 2138. It should be noted that the longest opening effect is generated only (or generated) when the symbol is changed when the ball enters the second main game start opening electric component B11d when the electric component is longest opened. For example, a change in the hold display mode, a change in the selected content of the effect (a change in the background or the content of the notice).

  Next, in step 2140, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2142. In the case of No in step 2130, the process of step 2132 to step 2140 is not executed, the process proceeds to step 2142, the hold display process is performed, and then the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). To do.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of prefetch effect execution determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the newly generated hold is a hold on the second main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set (temporarily stored) is the “long effect stage”.

  In the case of Yes in step 2156, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the new hold based on the hold information (particularly, the variation mode determination random number) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Pre-determine the fluctuation time. Next, in step 2160, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold variation time is determined to be equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Here, when the change time is preliminarily determined, for example, when the change mode random number value of the new hold is 900 to 1023, the change time is 10 seconds or more regardless of the hold number at the time of the new hold. Can be determined (see FIG. 10).

  In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit (for example, determination based on a winning lottery random number). In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a pre-reading effect lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2162, in step 2166, the CPUSC of the sub control board S wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5, but it may be lower than the winning probability in step 2164). The pre-reading effect lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2176.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2156, in step 2168, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set (temporarily stored in the RAM area) is the “fixed effect stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit (for example, determination based on a winning lottery random number). In the case of Yes in step 2170, in step 2172, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a pre-reading effect lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (for example, ¼), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2170, in step 2174, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is elected with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/6, but may be lower than the winning probability in step 2172). The pre-reading effect lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2176.

  Next, in step 2176, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a pre-reading effect lottery (the lottery of any of step 2164, step 2166, step 2172, or step 2174) has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2176, in step 2178, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the hold number temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S, and the hold (trigger hold) won in the lottery is digested. The number of stoppages Ha (0 to 4 times) of the main game symbol until the end is derived. Next, in step 2180, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and derives the number of times Hb of the main game symbol to be changed until the current stay stage ends based on the counter value. .

  Here, the variation stop count Hb includes the variation stop count of the symbol that is currently displayed in a variation manner. In addition, as described later, whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed is determined at the time of starting the change. Therefore, when the symbol is changing, the pre-reading effect can be executed from the next change in which the changing symbol is stopped. is there.

  Next, in step 2182, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the prefetch effect (Ha in this example) is the minimum prefetch effect number (the minimum number of times for executing an effective prefetch effect, for example, 2 times) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2182, in step 2184, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S satisfies the relationship that the derived Ha and Hb satisfy Ha ≦ Hb (the pre-reading effect ends during the current stay stage). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2184, in step 2186, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets Ha to the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2142). Note that if any of Step 2152, Step 2154, Step 2160, Step 2168, Step 2176, Step 2182, and Step 2184 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (Step 2142).

  In this way, when the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations does not end during the current stay stage, the pre-reading effect is not executed (in particular, step 2184), so that the table switching and the pre-reading effect are executed simultaneously. It is possible to avoid a situation where the player is confused. In the present embodiment, after the pre-reading effect lottery is executed, whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed is determined according to the determination as to whether or not the stay stage is crossed. The order may be changed as appropriate, for example, it may be configured to execute a pre-reading effect lottery after it is determined to cross the stay stage (that is, when it is planned to cross the stay stage, In the first place, it also includes a configuration that does not execute the pre-reading effect lottery itself).

  Note that the pre-reading effect in this example may include a change related to the trigger hold in the effect that occurs even with the change related to the trigger hold, that is, the plurality of changes in the pre-read effect over a plurality of changes. For example, an effect in which an effect in the same mode or an effect of the same system is generated from a change before the change related to the trigger hold to a change related to the trigger hold may be used.

  In addition, this example is only an example, and is not limited to this. For example, even when the end of the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations is after the end of the current stay stage (or switching), the pre-reading effect can be executed, When the pre-reading effect over a plurality of changes straddles the end (or switching) of the stay stage, the expectation that is a big hit in any change related to the pre-reading effect does not cross the end of the stay stage (or switching) You may comprise so that it may be relatively higher than the case where production is performed. In such a case, it becomes possible to attract the player's attention on whether or not the pre-reading effect occurs across the end (or switching) of the stay stage (and effect), and the interest of the game It will be possible to improve the nature.

  In addition, if the prefetching effect can be executed even when the prefetching effect over a plurality of variations is after the end (or switching) of the current stay stage, the prefetching effect is until the last variation when the current staying stage ends. It may be configured to end (suspend) at. Further, when the prefetching effect is interrupted, a prefetching effect different from the interrupted prefetching effect (for example, a prefetching effect or other effect corresponding to the effect at the stay stage after switching) can be executed instead. May be.

  In addition, in a certain stay stage, a high expectation effect or a pre-reading effect informing that a variation mode having a long variation time is selected in the subsequent variation, and the high expectation effect or When a variation mode with a long variation time is not selected, the high expectation effect or a variation mode with a long variation time may be selected at the next stay stage. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the pre-reading effect in the next stay stage is an effect in accordance with the next stay stage.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is ON. If YES in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the decorative symbol stop symbol {for example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, such as "7, 7, 7" In the case of a lost symbol, a variation such as “1, 3, 5”} and a variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

  Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes effect content determination processing described later. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Note that, also in the case of No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific game execution flag is OFF. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the longest release time hold permission permission flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2254, in step 2256, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect content determination table SM25ta {particularly the normal time table (longest open time hold permission permission flag off) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol}. }, The contents of the effect are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2254, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the longest release hold permission permission flag. Next, in step 2260, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the longest release time effect execution flag. Next, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta {particularly, the normal time table (longest open time hold permission permission flag ON}) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. Then, the contents of the effect are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  Here, FIG. 23 is an example of the effect content determination table SM25ta. In particular, the normal performance content determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the performance in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, and based on the variation mode of the main game symbol as shown in the figure. , One effect content is determined from a plurality of effect content candidates. In addition, when the longest open-time hold production permission flag is on, an effect similar to the production during the stay in the “long production stage” is determined (the longest open-time hold production permission flag is set). If it is “off”, the player can easily recognize that the effect during the stay in the “long stage” does not occur during the non-time-reduced game, and that the change is related to the hold that occurred at the time of the longest release. it can). In addition, this example is only an example, and the content of the production, the variation mode, the configuration of the table, etc. are not limited to this, and for example, the production is performed with reference to the variation mode (and the lottery result) of the main game symbol and the random number. You may comprise so that the content may be determined (It may comprise so that a different production can be performed when the fluctuation | variation aspect of the main game side is the same).

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, on the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, that is, in the case where the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, in step 2264, the CPUSC of the sub control board S It is determined whether or not the value is greater than 0 (a situation where a prefetch effect is executed). In the case of Yes in step 2264, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S decrements (decrements) the value of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c. Next, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the currently set stay stage is the “long effect stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2268, in step 2270, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads the prefetch effect dedicated to the “long effect stage” (for example, “at the start of the change,“ ... more times! ”) And the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c. A command for displaying (effect to count down the value) is set, and the process proceeds to Step 2274.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2268, in other words, in the case where the pre-reading effect is executed in the “fixed effect stage”, in step 2272, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the “fixed effect stage” fluctuates. The effect content at is determined as a pre-reading effect dedicated to the stage (for example, an effect in which the background display color changes based on the degree of expectation of jackpot), and the process proceeds to Step 2274. Note that if the result is No in step 2264, the process proceeds to step 2274.

  Next, in step 2274, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta (particularly, the table for specific games) based on the main game symbol variation mode and the currently set stay stage. Then, the contents of the effect are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  Here, the specific game time effect content determination table in FIG. 23 is a table that is referred to when determining the effect in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state (80 STs in this example). As shown, the content of the effect is switched according to the set stay stage (the number of times of variation during the ST) (the content of the effect is also switched in response to the change of the variation mode / variation time of the main game symbol). Configured). An example of the contents of the production will be described. The fixed time production, which is the production selected as the “fixed production stage”, starts with the change of the decorative design, as shown in the image diagram at the bottom of the figure. When the image related to the change is displayed for 1 second, the effect at the success / failure stage is displayed for 1 second. Here, the effect at the success / failure stage is an image prompting the operation of the sub input button SB if the pre-reading effect is not executed, and after the effect is displayed, there is an operation of the sub input button SB or for another 1 second. After the elapse of time, the display shifts to the effect display at the success / failure notification stage. On the other hand, if the pre-reading effect is being executed, the effect at the success / failure stage is the effect that the display color of the background image changes determined in the process of step 2268 (that is, the effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB does not occur). ), And after one second has passed after the effect display, the display shifts to the effect display at the success / failure notification stage. Next, in the success / failure notification stage, an effect of notifying the player whether the change is a win or a loss is executed. When the prefetch effect continues, the execution state of the prefetch effect (in this example, the background display color) may be inherited until the end of the prefetch effect. When the fixed time has elapsed), an image for notifying the result of the change is displayed. In addition, this example is only an example, and the content of the production, the variation mode, the configuration of the table, etc. are not limited to this, and for example, the production is performed with reference to the variation mode (and the lottery result) of the main game symbol and the random number. You may comprise so that the content may be determined (It may comprise so that a different production can be performed when the fluctuation | variation aspect of the main game side is the same). Although not specifically shown in the present example, a dedicated effect (for example, a super battle reach, a special battle reach, etc.) is executed in any stay stage during the specific game even when the first main game side is suspended. You may comprise so that it may obtain. In addition, an effect that prompts the user to operate the sub input button SB may be configured not to be executed in a situation where the effect execution scale is difficult to secure (for example, when staying in the “short effect stage” in this example). Is preferred.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag in step 2304. Next, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 2309, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2310. In the case of No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

  Next, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2311, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S checks the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the decorative symbol variation start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the decorative symbol variation display command (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). Then, the process proceeds to Step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2312, in step 2316, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the decorative symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2316, in step 2318, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbols (in the display command transmission control process of step 2900, the sub sub control unit SS side) The process proceeds to step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2316, in step 2320, whether the CPUSC of the sub control board S has reached the display timing of the warning image or the reach image based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets an image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (in the display command transmission control process of step 2900, to the sub sub control unit SS side). The process proceeds to step 2330. Note that if the result in Step 2320 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2330.

  Next, in step 2330, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2331, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a decoration symbol stop display command (deterministic display command) (transmits to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). To do). Next, in Step 2332, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2334, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol changing flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2400). Note that if the answer is No in Step 2310 or Step 2330, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the big hit is the first hit (the big hit in the non-probability variation / non-time shortened gaming state). If YES in step 2406, the process proceeds to step 2410. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2406 (if it is the first hit), in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the longest release hold execution execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, in the case of N = first hit, in step 2409, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the longest opening time pending execution execution flag, and proceeds to step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the value of the consecutive game count counter SM23c2, and proceeds to step 2412. In the case of No in step 2408, the process proceeds to step 2412.

  Next, in step 2412 and step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special gaming flag, and performs a big hit start display on the effect display device SG (performs appropriate display based on the type of the big hit). Then, the process proceeds to step 2416. In the case of No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2416.

  Next, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gameability and jackpot). It may be executed as needed based on the type). Next, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the big hit being executed is the maximum round big hit (for example, the 16R big hit and the big hit relating to the 7A / 7B symbols). judge. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the ending effect {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive games during a specific game, the total number of balls earned at the time of consecutive games, and a plurality of types of identification A command related to the display of special game or production during specific game, which is displayed only when a condition of one or a plurality of combinations such as generation of all effects is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step 2426. On the other hand, if any of step 2418 and step 2420 is No, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the big hit progress display, and proceeds to step 2426.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect displayed during the jackpot execution a special effect based on the number of consecutive hits of the jackpot (the initial hit is not counted), and the second main game start opening In the case where a big hit is caused by the holding caused by the entry of the electric accessory B11d during the longest opening, even if the big hit is the first hit, the second main game start opening electric combination is counted as the number of consecutive games. It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of a change related to the hold that occurs during the longest release of the object B11d. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of conditions as conditions for generating an ending effect, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit with a specific effect) , Etc.) may be considered to be satisfied.

  Next, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2428, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (performs a display appropriately based on the big hit type). Next, in step 2430, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the special gaming flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). Note that if the answer is No in step 2404 or step 2426, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

(Function)
Next, the operation in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a prefetch effect during a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where a specific game is completed without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, in the situation of the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, after the first main game side holding balls are digested and the second main game side holding balls become four, at the timing of 1 in the figure The second main game symbol will start to change. Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, when the main game symbol fluctuates 30 times after the special game, the short effect stage ends and the long effect stage is entered.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long performance stage is 40 (Ha ≦ Hb). Will be. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, since the first change of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the prefetch effect is determined, the prefetch effect is executed from the change.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the change of the second main game symbol related to the digestion of the trigger suspension is started. The change related to the trigger hold is a loss, and the change related to the trigger hold in the long performance stage is a change time of 10 seconds or more, so the change time is 60 seconds. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the pre-reading effect ends when the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold ends.

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long performance stage is 1 (Ha> Hb). Will not be. Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the main game symbol has changed 70 times after the special game, the long effect stage is ended and the process proceeds to the fixed effect stage.

  Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, since the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger pending digest is 2 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the fixed performance stage is 10 (Ha ≦ Hb), the pre-reading effect is executed. Will be. Next, at the timing of 10 in the figure, since the first change of the second main game symbol has started after execution of the prefetch effect is determined, the prefetch effect is executed from the change. Next, at the timing of 11 in the figure, the pre-reading effect ends when the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold ends. Note that since the prefetching effect is a prefetching effect in the fixed stage, the change time related to the trigger suspension is also 5 seconds. Next, at the timing of 12 in the figure, when the main game symbol has changed 80 times after the special game, the fixed effect stage ends and the specific game also ends.

  Next, the operation in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a variation mode of a main game symbol during a specific game after the special game is ended. In addition, in this example, the case where a long production stage is complete | finished without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, under the situation of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol that becomes the first variation in the specific game is started. As shown in the lower part of the figure, at the time of losing, the limited frequency table 1 on the first main game side and the limited frequency table 1 on the second main game side have the same table contents and do not depend on the number of holds. . In this case (the contents of the table surrounded by a dotted line in the limited frequency table 1) is X. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side changes from two to one due to the change.

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the first main game symbol change that becomes the second change in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. There is one hold on the first main game side at the start of the fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to this timing, and there is one hold on the first main game side at the start of change of the first main game symbol related to the timing shown in FIG. Although there is one, the table contents to be referred to are X regardless of the number of holds.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that becomes the third variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that becomes the fifth variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side is changed from three to two due to the change. At the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to this timing, there are three holds on the second main game side, and at the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to timing 3 in the figure, the hold on the second main game side is Although there is one, the table contents to be referred to are X regardless of the number of holds.

  Thus, in this example, during the short stage, regardless of whether the change is on the first main game side or the second main game side, and regardless of the number of holds, the change mode is determined. The contents of the referenced table are the same.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, since the change of the main game symbol, which is the 30th change in the specific game, is finished, the short effect stage is ended and the long effect stage is switched. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the 31st variation in the specific game is started. The table content to be referred to when the timing is changed is Z. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change. Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the 32nd variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to when the timing is changed are Y. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. There is only one hold on the second main game side at the start of change of the second main game symbol related to this timing, and there is no hold on the second main game side at the start of change of the second main game symbol related to timing 6 in the figure. Since there are two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of holds (Y and Z).

  Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol that becomes the 33rd variation in the specific game is started. The table content to be referred to when the timing is changed is Z. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change. Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, the change of the first main game symbol that is the 34th change in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to when the timing is changed are Y. Further, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. At the start of change of the first main game symbol related to this timing, there is one hold on the first main game side, and at the start of change of the first main game symbol related to timing 8 in the figure, the hold on the first main game side is Since there are two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of holds (Y and Z).

  In this way, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode are the same regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side during the long performance stage. However, when the number of holdings is different, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode can be different.

  Note that the contents of the table when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol during a specific game are not limited to this, and an example of the operation will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a variation mode of a main game symbol during a specific game after the special game is ended. In addition, in this example, the case where a long production stage is complete | finished without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the change of the second main game symbol that becomes the second change in the specific game is started. Also, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the variation mode of the second main game symbol has different table contents depending on whether or not the first main game side is on hold at the time of losing. Let X ′ be the case where there is a hold on the first main game side. The case where there is no hold on the first main game side is set as Y ′. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X 'because there is a hold on the first main game side. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change. Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol that is the fourth variation in the specific game is started. Due to the change, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side is changed from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the fifth variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are Y 'because there is no hold on the first main game side. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change.

  Thus, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode on the second main game side during the short performance stage are configured to differ depending on whether or not there is a hold on the first main game side.

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, since the change of the main game symbol, which is the 30th change in the specific game, is finished, the short effect stage is ended and the long effect stage is switched. Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the second main game symbol that becomes the 32nd fluctuation in the specific game is started, and at the timing of 6 in the figure, the second main game that becomes the 35th fluctuation in the specific game. The design changes. At the start of the change of the second main game symbol at the timing 5 in the figure, the number of the first main game side is one hold, whereas the change of the second main game symbol at the timing 6 in the figure At the time, there are 0 holds on the first main game side, but the table contents referred to when determining the variation mode of the second main game symbol are the same, and the variation time is both 10 seconds. ing.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the number of times of change of the main game symbol is predetermined in the game in the probability variation game state (and the time shortening game state) with the number of times limited. In response to the number of times, the candidates for the variation mode (variation time) to be selected are different (switched). In addition, by changing the contents of the effect according to the change of the change mode, the mode of the effect is changed according to the progress of the game in the specific game {probability change game state with a limited number of times (and time-reduced game state)}. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the game.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
In addition, although not specifically shown in the present example, if there is a big win (especially the hold on the second main game side) at the end of the special game, by executing a special effect, It is possible to produce the jackpot related to in a novel way. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of a special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 4 in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 1636 (Modification 1) to Step 1800 (Modification 1), the purpose of which is to execute an end demo. That is, when the final round of the special game is completed, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the end demonstration execution permission flag in Step 1636 (Modification 1), and proceeds to Step 1638 (Modification 1). Next, in Step 1638 (Variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demonstration execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 1638 (Modification 1), in Step 1800 (Modification 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an end demo time control process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1997). . It should be noted that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997) also in the case of No in step 1638 (change 1).

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process according to the subroutine of Step 1800 (Modification 1) in FIG. First, in step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demonstration execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a long demo time big hit symbol (7A and 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds a long time (for example, 10 seconds) to the end demo time timer (the main timer for measuring the end demo time of the special game). Set and start, then proceed to Step 1810. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1804, in other words, if the stop symbol is the short demo time big hit symbol (3A, 3B, 5A, 5B), in step 1808, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the end demo time timer. A short time (for example, 3 seconds) is set and started, and the process proceeds to Step 1810. Next, in step 1810, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command to the sub-side and a command related to the determined end demo time information (step 1999, the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process) Sent to the side). Next, in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the end demonstration execution flag, and proceeds to step 1814. In the case of No in step 1802, the process proceeds to step 1814.

  Next, in step 1814, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1814, in step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the end demonstration execution flag. Next, in step 1818, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the end demonstration execution permission flag. Next, in step 1820, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1650, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the above-described gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1997). Even in the case of No in step 1814, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 17 in the first modification from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 2480 (Modification 1) to Step 2600 (Modification 1), and the purpose is to execute the end demonstration effect and the end demonstration extension effect. That is, after turning off the special game, in step 2480 (change 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the end demonstration time is long (10 seconds). In the case of Yes in Step 2480 (Modification 1), in Step 2482 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts by setting a long time (for example, 10 seconds) in the demonstration time display timer, and starts in Step 2486 ( Change to 1). On the other hand, if No in Step 2480 (Modification 1), in Step 2484 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts by setting a short time (for example, 3 seconds) in the demonstration time display timer. Move to 2486 (Variant 1).

  Next, in Step 2486 (Variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying an end demo image (for example, an image informing the number of game balls acquired, the number of consecutive games, etc.) (Step 2900). In the display command transmission control process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side). Next, in Step 2488 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the end demonstration display flag, and proceeds to Step 2490 (Modification 1). Note that if the answer is No in Step 2404 or Step 2426, the process proceeds to Step 2490 (Modification 1).

  By making the changes as described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, at the end of the special game, the end demo effect for informing the result of the special game or the like can be executed, and after the demonstration effect ends. (After the special game is over), a predetermined period after the start of the change of the main game (special game) (if there is a big hit hold, if there is no big hit hold until the end of the big hit change, it relates to the hold that currently exists By displaying the same effect as the demonstration effect (e.g., continuously displaying an image notifying the result of the special game even during the main game symbol change) When there is a big hit hold in the hold, it is configured to display an image substantially the same as the demonstration effect until immediately before the symbol stop (= big hit) related to the big hit hold, After the end of the special game, it will be a novel effect, such as suddenly becoming the next big hit without recognizing changes during the specific game, and recognizing that the special game has started again, improving the fun of the game It becomes possible. In addition, by making the execution time of the end demo effect different depending on the main game symbol won in the big hit, the player can make the end demo effect and the effect of changing the main game symbol performing the same effect as the end demo effect. This makes it impossible to distinguish between them, and the fun of the game will increase.

  Next, in Step 2490 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the end demonstration display flag is ON. In the case of Yes in Step 2490 (Modification 1), in Step 2492 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S has the value of the demonstration time display timer (the sub-side timer for measuring the end demonstration time of the special game). It is determined whether or not it is zero. In the case of Yes in Step 2492 (Modification 1), in Step 2600 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes an end demonstration extension effect execution process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2900). To do. Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2900) also in the case of No in Step 2490 (Modification 1) or Step 2492 (Modification 1).

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, after the special game is over, the game is always shifted to the probability variation gaming state with the number of times limited, and the effect of the game is enhanced by gradually changing the production of the period in the probability variation gaming state. Configured to improve. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the player's expectation cannot be expressed in terms of whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state depending on the jackpot symbol. Therefore, a configuration for solving such a problem is a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter in the second grand prize opening C20. In addition, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a configuration (so-called ball check) in which a game ball enters a specific area C22 during execution of a special game, and then shifts to a probability-changing game machine state after the special game ends. Machine).

  First, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 8 in the second embodiment. First, the differences from this embodiment are step 1408 (second), step 14012-1 (second), and step 1412-2 (second), the purpose of which is a non-stochastic game state and time reduction. The variation mode in the gaming state is different from that shown in the present embodiment. That is, after determining the stop symbol of the main game symbol in step 1410-2, in step 1408 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game short time flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1408 (second), in step 1412-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode of the main game symbol based on the main game side random number / winning lottery result. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1408 (second), the process proceeds to step 1411, and the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value is zero. If Yes in step 1411, that is, if the limited frequency counter value is 0, in step 1412-2 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game based on the main game side random number / winning lottery result. The variation mode of the symbol is determined. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, the same processing as in this embodiment is executed in the processing of steps 1450 and 1413.

  FIG. 33 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the combination of main game symbols that are big hits is different, and a table that is referred to in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is provided. Of the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbols for which a special game that makes it easy for a game ball to enter a specific area is “5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, and 7B”. The main game symbol in which a special game that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the area is executed is “2A”.

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 4 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1611 (second) and step 1850 (second), and the purpose thereof is a distribution game (unit game that opens the second big prize opening C20 having a specific area). ) Can be executed. That is, after setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1608 or when the special game execution flag is on, in step 1611 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M It is determined whether the round to be executed is a sorting game execution round (in this example, the second R, 4R). If YES in step 1611 (second), in step 1850 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a distribution game execution process to be described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1611 (second), the process proceeds to step 1612 and the same processing as in this embodiment is executed.

  Next, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) in FIG. 34 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process moves to step 1866. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates that the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (the second big prize opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a big hit symbol that is open for time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses a long open pattern (for example, 15 seconds open) as the open pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. , An opening pattern designed to make the entry into the specific area C22 deterministic or easy to enter is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in other words, if the stop symbol is 2A, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the short opening pattern as the opening pattern of the second major winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. -(For example, an opening pattern designed to be 0.1 second opening and non-entry into the specific area C22 is deterministic or difficult to enter), and the process proceeds to Step 1860 . In the second embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is “5A · 7A”, and the ratio selected at the time of big hit is “524/1024”. The long open symbol on the side is “3B, 5B, 7B”, and the ratio selected at the time of big hit is “1024/1024”, so the second main game side than the big hit on the first main game side It is configured that the ratio of the big hit of No. 2 is higher in the second big prize opening C20 in the distributed game execution round, that is, the game ball easily enters the specific area C22 at the time of the big hit.

  Next, in step 1860, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 1864, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

  Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won the second big winning opening C20. . If Yes in step 1866, the process proceeds to step 1870. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1866, in step 1868, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second big prize opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1870. Next, in step 1870, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1872, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game execution flag. Next, in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in step 1876, and proceeds to step 1878. In the case of No in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, in step 1878, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1634). Even in the case of No in step 1868, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1634).

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 34 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 1680 (second), step 1682 (second), step 1684 (second), and step 1686 (second), the purpose of which is the second embodiment. In the sorting game executed at, whether to enter the probability variation gaming state and the upper limit value of the number of times of variation in the time-reduced gaming state are made different depending on whether or not a specific area C22 has been entered. That is, when this subroutine is executed, in step 1680 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1680 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in step 1682 (second). Next, in steps 1652 and 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c and turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1684 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c and proceeds to step 1658, and thereafter in steps 1658 and 1660. The same processing as that of the present embodiment is executed.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1680 (second), in step 1686 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a predetermined number of times B (in this example, 50 times) in the time-count counter MP52c. The value is preferably a predetermined number A or less), and the process proceeds to step 1658.

  Here, in 2nd Embodiment, it is comprised so that it may transfer to a time shortening game state after completion | finish of a special game irrespective of the presence or absence of the entrance to the specific area | region C22 during a special game. In addition, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of times of change in the time-reduced game state after the special game is the same as the number of times of change in the probability change game state A (In this example, 80 times), and when there is no game ball entering the specific area during the special game, the number of times of change to the time-saving game state after the special game is different from the predetermined number A (less) ) Is a predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example). In addition, the variation mode of the main game symbol during the time-reduced gaming state is such that a three-stage limited frequency table (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3) is used for a predetermined number A of time-reduced gaming states. The main game table 3-2 is referred to in the time-reduced game state of the predetermined number of times B, and a table with a different effect content is also referred to. In addition, the said structure is applied also when the big jackpot symbol that triggered the execution of the special game is the same or different (for example, even if it is a special game triggered by the same jackpot symbol, the execution of the special game The number of time reductions differs depending on whether or not the player enters the specific area C22. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit number of time-saving games may be determined based on the symbol at the time of big hit (for example, during special games) In the case where the specific area C22 is not entered, the variation upper limit number of time-saving games is determined by the big hit symbol, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 37 is an example of an effect content determination table in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that there is an effect content determination table that is referred to in the lower right side of the figure, which is referred to in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. In the second embodiment, if a game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during a special game, the game state after the special game is not a probability variation game state, but a non-probability variation / time shortening game state (50 variations). ) In such a case, the contents of the effect are determined with reference to the table. Note that this example is merely an example, and the number of changes, the contents of effects, the change mode, the configuration of the table, and the like are not limited thereto.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, whether or not to enter the probability-variable gaming state after execution of the special game is determined depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game (specific area) In the case of a game machine (so-called tamagyo type game machine) that does not enter the probability variation gaming state without entering the ball and does not transition to the probability variation gaming state without entering the ball, By changing the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening game state from the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation game state, an appropriate production according to the player's profit mode is executed. It can be done. Although not specifically shown in the present example, when executing the distribution game, a dedicated effect (the effect of inquiring whether or not the second big prize opening C20 is long open, the entry to the specific area C22) It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not a ball is made, an effect of notifying that a specific area C22 has been entered, etc. {the execution mode is not particularly limited, In the case of the effect of notifying that the entry into the specific area C22 has been made, at the timing (desirably immediately after) that the entry has been made, the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG It can be exemplified that the notification is performed by a production device (for example, a so-called production movable body accessory or a light guide plate) provided on the front surface (for example, on the production display device SG). Display an image labeled “V” or The movable body role of use displacing the effect possible positions from the initial position, or to highlight an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light to the light guide plate, etc.)}.

  In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big prize opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, a first unit game that can be opened for a first time (preferably less than or less than one launch interval of game balls) and a predetermined time after the first time is released. And a second unit game that can be reopened (or opened and closed) for a second time longer than the first time after a time closure. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, the probability even after the opening operation of the first time when the expectation to the probability fluctuation transition is low ends. There is a possibility that a second time opening operation with high expectation to change transition is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. The second time is preferably equal to or greater than one game ball launch interval or more in order to secure entry to a specific area, (half of the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (game It is more preferable that it is equal to or greater than or equal to or greater than (one launch interval of the ball), and it is particularly preferable that it is equal to or greater than (the upper limit winning number of the round) × (one launch interval of the game ball).

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, whether or not to enter the probability-variable gaming state after execution of the special game is determined depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game (specific area) In the case of a game machine (so-called tamagyo type game machine) that does not enter the probability variation gaming state without entering the ball and does not transition to the probability variation gaming state without entering the ball, By changing the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening game state from the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation game state, an appropriate production according to the player's profit mode is executed. It can be done. Although not specifically shown in the present example, when executing the distribution game, a dedicated effect (the effect of inquiring whether or not the second big prize opening C20 is long open, the entry to the specific area C22) It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not a ball is made, an effect of notifying that a specific area C22 has been entered, etc. {the execution mode is not particularly limited, In the case of the effect of notifying that the entry into the specific area C22 has been made, at the timing (desirably immediately after) that the entry has been made, the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG It can be exemplified that the notification is performed by a production device (for example, a so-called production movable body accessory or a light guide plate) provided on the front surface (for example, on the production display device SG). Display an image labeled “V” or The movable body role of use displacing the effect possible positions from the initial position, or to highlight an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light to the light guide plate, etc.)}.

  In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big prize opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, a first unit game that can be opened for a first time (preferably less than or less than one launch interval of game balls) and a predetermined time after the first time is released. And a second unit game that can be reopened (or opened and closed) for a second time longer than the first time after a time closure. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, the probability even after the opening operation of the first time when the expectation to the probability fluctuation transition is low ends. There is a possibility that a second time opening operation with high expectation to change transition is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. The second time is preferably equal to or greater than one game ball launch interval or more in order to secure entry to a specific area, (half of the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (game It is more preferable that it is equal to or greater than or equal to or greater than (one launch interval of the ball), and it is particularly preferable that it is equal to or greater than (the upper limit winning number of the round) × (one launch interval of the game ball).

  In addition, in a gaming machine (so-called a ball-like machine) that can shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is finished by entering the specific area C22 during execution of the special game as in the second embodiment, 1) There is only one grand prize opening, and at that single big prize opening, a normal round (a round in which the entry to the specific area C22 is invalid) and an allocation game execution round (a entry to the specific area C22) (2) A special winning opening A and a large winning opening B having a specific area C22 are provided, and a normal round is executed at the large winning opening A. (3) In the arrangement that overlaps vertically with the big prize opening A and the big prize opening B having the specific area C22 (the big prize opening B is on the top) Establish a regular round at Grand Prize Winner A, and at Grand Prize Winner B Execute the minute game execution round, and the entry into the specific area C22 can be effective only during the execution of the distribution game execution round. (4) The big prize opening A and the big prize opening B having the specific area C22 and up and down Are arranged in such a way as to overlap (the winning prize opening B is at the top), the normal round is executed at the winning prize opening A, the distribution game execution round is executed at the winning prize opening B, and the distribution is executed. A game ball can enter the specific area C22 only during the execution of the game execution round (a shielding member is provided, and when the shielding member is in an open state, it is easy to enter the specific area C22 and the shielding member May be in a closed state, it is difficult to enter the specific area C22).

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine which enters the specific area C22 during execution of the special game and shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends is illustrated. The configuration is not limited to the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration having a specific area C22 different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 38 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is illustrated, that is, the number of winning balls in the first main game starting port A10 is 3, and the second main gaming starting port B10. The number of prize balls in the first prize winning opening C10 is 15, and the number of prize winning balls in the second prize winning opening C20 is 13. 10 balls. Thus, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the number of prize balls in the second big prize opening C20 is smaller than the number of prize balls in the first big prize opening C10.

  Next, FIG. 39 shows the first (second) main game symbol display process related to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 9 in the first modification from the second embodiment. It is a flowchart. First, the changes from the second embodiment are step 1450 (second modification 1), step 1431-1 (second modification 1), and step 1431-2 (second modification 1), that is, in step 1411. When the limited frequency counter value is not 0, in step 1450 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1413.

  In step 1440, after the condition device operation flag is turned on, in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is a limit frequency big hit symbol (time reduction after the big hit ends) It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot symbol that becomes a limited frequency state after the gaming state ends, and in this example, it is 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), in step 1431-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency counter to a predetermined number (100 times in this example). Set and go to step 1500.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second variation 1) in FIG. 11 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the first stage range (100 ≧ G> 21). In the case of Yes in step 1451-1, in step 1451-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 3 and based on the main game side random number and the lottery result, the variation mode related to the main game symbol ( (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). On the other hand, if No in step 1451-1, in step 1451-3, CPUMC of main control board M determines whether or not limited frequency counter value G is a value within the second stage range (G = 21). To do. When the limited frequency counter value is 21, it is the final fluctuation in the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-3, in step 1451-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-4, in step 1451-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1, and based on the main game side random number and the lottery result, the variation mode related to the main game symbol (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). In the case of No in step 1451-4, the process proceeds to step 1451-2, and the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined with reference to the main game table 3. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, in determining the variation mode between the case of the probability variation gaming state and the case of the non-probability variation gaming state in the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state. The table to be referred to is different, in other words, when the game ball is entered into the specific area C22 during execution of the jackpot related to the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B", and when the ball is not entered, The tables to be referred to when determining the variation mode according to the final symbol variation in the time-saving gaming state are configured to be different. If No in step 1451-3, in step 1451-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 2 and relates to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery. The fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1413). In the first modification from the second embodiment, when the big hit relating to the limit frequency big hit symbol “7B” is completed, the limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, and the short time counter MP52c Is set to 80 times. With this configuration, when the limited frequency counter value is not within the first stage range, that is, when the limited frequency counter value is 20 or less, the non-time-reduced gaming state and the limited frequency counter value is 0. A bigger situation. In such a state, by referring to the limited frequency table and determining the variation mode of the main game symbol, when the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol “7B” is completed, Transition is made such that the time shortened gaming state for 80 variations → the limited frequency state for 20 symbol variations (non-time shortened gaming state). It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and in the time-saving gaming state, the limited frequency state A (the limited frequency table to be referred to is “limited frequency table A1 → limited frequency table A2 → limited” in the period of 80 symbol variations. Frequency table A3 ”), and the limited frequency state B (the limited frequency table to be referred to is“ limited frequency ”) in the period of 20 symbol fluctuations after the time-saving gaming state ends and shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state. In other words, the limited frequency state may be configured not to straddle different game states. In addition, when “7B”, which is the limit frequency big hit symbol, is won, 80 is set in the short-time counter MP52c regardless of whether or not the player enters the specific area C22 during execution of the special game related to “7B”. The limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, that is, the limited frequency state is entered after the time-saving gaming state is completed. If the limited frequency counter value is not 0, it may be regarded as a big hit in the extended game, and the aforementioned extended game counter value may be added (the time-saving gaming state is Even if it is finished, if you win a big hit in a limited frequency state, you can consider it as a big hit in the Renso.) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when “7B”, which is the limit frequency big hit symbol, is won, and the player enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to “7B”, the time-count counter MP52c is displayed. 80 times is set and the limited frequency counter is set to 100 times. On the other hand, when the ball does not enter the specific area C22, the short time counter MP52c is set to 50 times and the limited frequency counter is set to 70 times. You may comprise. In addition, when “7B”, which is the limit frequency big hit symbol, is won, in the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game in the case of not entering the specific area C22 during execution of the special game related to the “7B” In the final variation, a variation mode of the main game symbol may be determined with reference to a limited frequency table (for example, the limited frequency table 3) referred to only by the final variation. Note that the contents of the limited frequency table 3 may be configured so that a uniform variation time of 7 seconds is determined regardless of the number of holds, in both cases of winning and losing. In addition, when “7B”, which is the limit frequency big hit symbol, is won, in the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game in the case of not entering the specific area C22 during execution of the special game related to the “7B” The limited frequency table referred to by the final variation is referred to by the final variation in the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game when entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to “7B”. The tables may be configured to be the same. In such a configuration, the content of the effect and the effect tendency in the final change in the time-saving gaming state may be the same.

  Here, FIG. 41 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are that the combination of main game symbols that are big hits is different and that a limited frequency table is provided. Of the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbols for which a special game that makes it easy for a game ball to enter a specific area is “5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, and 7B”. The main game symbol in which a special game that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the area is executed is “4A”. In addition, when the big hit related to “7B” which is the limit frequency big hit symbol described above is completed, the game shifts to a time reduction gaming state of 80 symbol fluctuations (the fluctuation time is determined with reference to the main game table 3). When the 80 symbol variations are completed, the transition to the limited frequency state of the 20 symbol variations is performed thereafter (the variation time is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 2). In the limited frequency state in which the limited frequency table 2 is referenced, the main game symbol variation time is configured so that a long time exceeding 10 seconds is not selected regardless of the winning lottery result. In addition, the final variation (80th variation after the end of the big hit) that is shifted to the time when the big hit relating to the limit frequency big hit symbol “7B” ends is specified during the execution of the “7B”. When there is an entry into the area C22, the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 1, while when there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the execution of “7B”, The variation mode is determined with reference to the game table 3 (the shortest variation time in the limited frequency table 1 is longer than the shortest variation time in the main game table 3) . It should be noted that the limited frequency table 1 or the main game table 3 can be referred to in the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state, but the case where the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the non-stochastic variation game. The content of the effect in the final variation may be different from that in the state, that is, the content of the effect in the final variation may be different depending on whether or not a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. Good. For example, when referring to the limited frequency table 1 that is a relatively long-time symbol variation, whether the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are ended or a big hit is caused by the symbol variation. An effect may be executed.

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 15 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the changes from the second embodiment are step 1611 (second modification 1), steps 1635-1 (second modification 1), and 1635-2 (second modification 1). After setting the special game start display instruction command to the side or when the special game execution flag is turned on in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M is currently executed in step 1611 (second variation 1). It is determined whether or not the round to be performed is a distribution game execution round (the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is to be opened, and in this example, the second R and the fourth R). If Yes in step 1611 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1850 (second), and if No, the process proceeds to step 1612.

  If it is the final round in the special game in step 1634, in step 1635-1 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the end demo execution permission flag (turned on, the special game end demonstration). The flag that will start the time) is turned on, and the flow proceeds to Step 1635-2 (second variation 1). Even in the case of No in step 1634, the process proceeds to step 1635-2 (second modification 1). Next, in step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demonstration execution permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1635-2 (second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 1800 (modification 1), and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process according to the subroutine of Step 1800 (Modification 1) of FIG. 30 (Modification 1) in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is step 1803 (second modification 1), that is, if the end demonstration execution flag is OFF in step 1802, step 1803 (second modification 1), The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a ball entering the specific area C22 in the special game. If Yes in step 1803 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1806, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1808. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the special game end demonstration time, which is the period after the end of the last round of the special game, is the time when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. The time value is different depending on whether or not there is a ball. In addition, the conditions that the special game end demonstration time is different are not limited to this, and may be different depending on the game state at the time of the big hit, for example. Specifically, (1) it differs depending on whether it is a probability variation gaming state or a non-probability variation gaming state, (2) it differs depending on whether it is a time shortening gaming state or a non-time shortening gaming state, ( 3) a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, a probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, (4) a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, a probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, and a non-stochastic variation gaming state and You may comprise so that it may differ by a part combination with a non-time shortening game state.

  Also, in this example, for a special game related to a certain jackpot symbol, (1) a special game when a special game is won in the non-time-reduced game state and a special game is entered into the specific area C22 during the special game. Game end demonstration time is the first period (10 seconds), (2) Special game end demonstration time when a special game is won in the non-time-reduced game state and there is no entry to the specific area C22 during the special game Is the second period (3 seconds), (3) If the special game is won in the time-reduced game state and a special area C22 is entered during the special game, the special game end demonstration time is the second period ( (1 second), (4) If the special game is won in the time-reduced game state and there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the special game, the special game end demonstration time is the third period (3 seconds) In this way, the configuration may be such that “second period <third period <first period”. Such a configuration is preferably applied to a special game won in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state or the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. In addition, as a specific example of the effect executed at the special game end demonstration time, in the first period, the effect of notifying the transition to the probability variation game state, forgetting to pick up the IC card used for renting the game ball An effect related to alerting the player, an effect that displays the logo of the gaming machine maker, and an effect that informs the transition to the non-stochastic game state and the time-reduced game state in the third period, forgetting to remove the IC card An effect related to alerting is executed, and in the second period, an effect of notifying that the probability variation gaming state (the consecutive resort state) continues is executed. In this way, the effect executed depending on the length of the special game end demonstration time may be different. Also, when comparing the length of the special game end demo time according to the situation, the special game end demo time when the special game is in a non-stochastic variable gaming state and the special game is in a probability variable gaming state (first hit) Is 10 seconds, special game end demonstration time is 3 seconds when the special game ends after the non-stochastic game state and time-reduced game state, the probability change game state before the start of the special game and the probability change after the special game ends You may comprise so that it may become the relationship of time values, such as special game completion | finish demonstration time for 1 second when it will be in a gaming state (continuation resort continuous).

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 in FIG. 17 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2480 (second variation 1) to step 2484 (second variation 1). That is, after turning off the special game in step 2430, in step 2480 (second variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the special game end command is a long release command (end demo set in step 1810). It is a command related to time information, and it is determined whether or not it is a command related to the fact that the end demo time is 10 seconds, which is a long time. In the case of Yes in step 2480 (second modification 1), in step 2482 (second modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S notifies that the consecutive game continuation image (the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game) For example, a command for displaying “Congratulations! Still more!” Is displayed for a long time (in this example, 10 seconds), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900). On the other hand, if No in step 2480 (second variation 1), that is, if the special game end command is a short release command, in step 2484 (second variation 1), the extended game end image (probability after the end of special game) This is an effect to notify that the game does not shift to the variable game state. For example, a command for displaying “see again!” For a short time (3 seconds in this example) is set, and the next processing (step 2900) Process). Although the special game end demonstration time is long (10 seconds) and short time (3 seconds), the presentation mode executed at the special game end demonstration time is different. Production mode (production tendency) in the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game when the game end demo time is long (10 seconds), and special when the special game end demo time is short (3 seconds) It is configured to be the same as the effect mode (effect tendency) in the time-saving game state after the game ends.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, a special game end demonstration time is provided after the final round in the special game ends, and is specified by the special game being executed. Since the period of the special game end demonstration time is different depending on whether or not a game ball has entered the area C22, it is highly beneficial to the player when entering the specific area C22. While performing an effect that congratulates the player of the time, if the player does not enter the specific area C22, it is not highly profitable for the player, so that the player returns to the normal game after performing the effect for a short time. It can be a gaming machine with more intonation.

  In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, a special game start demonstration time may be provided. In the special game start demonstration time, it is not determined whether or not a game ball enters the specific area C22 in the special game. Therefore, the special game start demonstration time depends on whether or not the specific area C22 has entered. This period will not be different. However, the special game start demonstration time may be different depending on the game state when the special game is won. For example, when the special game is won in the non-time-reduced game state, 10 seconds (right to the player) If the special game is won in the non-time-reduced gaming state, it is 3 seconds (relative because the effect that prompts the player to perform a right strike is not executed). For a short time).

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment and the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine that enters the specific area C22 during execution of the special game and shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends. Although illustrated, such a configuration is not limited to the configuration of the second embodiment and the modified example 1 from the second embodiment. Accordingly, the configuration having the specific area C22 different from the second embodiment and the first modification from the second embodiment is referred to as a second modification from the second embodiment. Hereinafter, only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail. Describe.

  First, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 4 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1609-1 (second variation 2) and step 3100 (second variation 2). That is, in step 1608, a special game start display instruction command to the sub-side After the setting, in step 1609-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demonstration execution permission flag, and proceeds to step 3100 (second variation 2). On the other hand, also in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 3100 (second modification 2). Next, in step 3100 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a start demonstration time control process described later, and proceeds to step 1610.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of Step 1850 (second) in FIG. 34 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, the differences from the second embodiment are step 1851-1 (second modification 2), step 1899-1 (second modification 2) to step 1899-7 (second modification 2), that is, step. In 1851-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag during the distribution demo time is off. If Yes in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 1852, and if No, the process moves to step 1854. After setting the long release pattern at step 1856 or after setting the short release pattern at step 1858, at step 1899-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M It is determined whether or not the first main game symbol (first main game big hit symbol). In the case of Yes in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in step 1899-2 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the distribution start demonstration timer for a long time {step 1899-3 (second variation 2). It is a time value that is longer than the time value set in Variant 2), and in this example, 10 seconds} is set and the process proceeds to Step 1899-4 (Second Variant 2). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in other words, when the stop symbol is the second main game symbol (second main game big hit symbol), step 1899-3 (second variation 2) ), The CPUMC of the main control board M is a time value that is shorter than the time value set in the distribution start demo timer {step 1899-2 (second variation 2). Seconds} is set and the process proceeds to Step 1899-4 (second variable 2). Next, in step 1899-4 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a command related to the determined distribution start demonstration time information (a command to the sub-control board S side, which is being executed) Set the command related to the time value of the game distribution demo time. Next, in step 1899-5 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution demo time flag (the flag that starts the distribution demo time when it is turned on). Move to 1899-6 (2nd change 2). Note that if the answer is No in step 1851-1 (second modification 2), the process proceeds to step 1899-6 (second modification 2). Next, in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the value of the distribution start demonstration timer is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1899-6 (second modification 2), in step 1899-7 (second modification 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the flag during the distribution demonstration time, and proceeds to step 1860. . In addition, in step 1899-6 (2nd modification 2), when it is No, it transfers to the following process (process of step 1634). As described above, in the second modified example from the second embodiment, the distribution start demonstration time, which is the start demonstration time of the distribution game execution round, is the second when the first main game side is a big hit. The time is longer than when the main game is a big hit.

  Next, FIG. 47 is a configuration diagram of an example of a special winning opening opening pattern. The jackpot symbol in the second embodiment is a total of six types of jackpots, three types of the first main game jackpot symbol "4A · 5A · 7A" and three types of the second main game jackpot symbol "4B · 5B · 7B" There are only two types of open patterns in one round: “short open = 500 ms open → closed” and “long open = 30000 ms open → closed”. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the grand prize opening (the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20) is not limited to this, the number of types may be increased, and it may be opened multiple times in one round. An open pattern (for example, “10000 ms open → 10000 ms closed → 10000 ms open → closed”) may be used. Here, in the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, only the second main game length opening big hit “5B / 7B” has a long opening of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in all rounds (16R). . In addition, the distribution game execution round in which the second grand prize opening C20 is to be opened is the fourth round, and in the other rounds, the first big prize opening is to be opened. Moreover, in all the big hits, the number of rounds to be executed is four or more rounds, and the distribution game execution round is always executed. In this way, there is a short opening round in the first main game length opening big hit “5A · 7A” (second R), while the second main gaming length opening big hit “5B · 7B” There are no rounds that are short-opened, that is, the number of rounds that are short-opened is such that there are more first main game length open big hits than second main game length open big hits.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the start demonstration time control process according to the subroutine of Step 3100 (second modification 2) in FIG. 45 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, in step 3102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the start demonstration execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts by setting the start demo time (3 seconds in this example) in the start demo time timer. Next, in step 3016, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is the second main game big hit symbol (3B, 5B and 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the second long release command (the special game related to the second main game big hit symbol is started as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. Command) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is the first main game length open big hit symbol (5A and 7A in this example). To do. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the first long release command (the second main winning opening in the first main game big win symbol as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. A command related to the start of a special game in which C20 is long open is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3110, in other words, the case where the stopped big hit symbol is not the first main game length open big hit symbol, that is, the first main game short open symbol (2A in this example). In step 3114, the CPU MC of the main control board M uses the first short opening command (the second main winning opening C20 in the first main gaming big hit symbol is short opened as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. The command related to the start of the special game is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116.

  Next, in step 3116, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined start demonstration time information to the sub side. Next, in step 3118, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demonstration execution flag, and proceeds to step 3120. Note that if the result of Step 3102 is No, the process proceeds to Step 3120. Next, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the start demonstration time timer is zero. In the case of Yes in step 3120, in step 3122, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demonstration execution flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demonstration execution permission flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1610). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3120, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1610).

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 in FIG. 17 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 2403-1 (second modification 2) to step 2403-11 (second modification 2) and step 2350 (second modification 2), that is, special game in step 2402. After turning off the middle flag, in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the special demonstration start flag (turning on the special game start demonstration time. It is determined whether or not (flag) is off. If YES in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the flow advances to step 2404. Next, in the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2403-2 (second modification 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) in the start demonstration display timer and sets the timer. Start. Next, in step 2403-3 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the start demonstration flag. Next, in step 2350 (second modification 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a start demonstration effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 2403-4 (second modification 2). Note that the process proceeds to step 2403-4 (second modification 2) also in the case of No in step 2403-1 (second modification 2).

  Next, in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the start demonstration time timer is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), in step 2403-5 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the start demonstration flag, and proceeds to step 2412. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2900).

  Also, after setting the command related to the big hit start display in step 2414, in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the command related to the distribution start demonstration time information from the main side. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S has a long distribution start demonstration time (in this example, 10 seconds). ). In the second modification from the second embodiment, there are two types of time values for the distribution start demonstration time, that is, the start demonstration time of the distribution game execution round, which are long time and short time. In the case of Yes in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), in step 2403-8 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not easily enter the ball at the long distribution start demonstration time. A notification effect (an effect that does not definitely notify the player whether or not the second big prize opening C20 becomes long open in the distribution game execution round or an effect that is difficult to notify) is executed, and step 2403-10 ( The process proceeds to the second modification 2). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), in step 2403-9 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S enters the ball at the distribution start demonstration time which becomes a short time. An easy notification effect (an effect that notifies the player that the second big prize opening C20 will be long open in the distribution game execution round or an effect that is easy to notify) is executed, and step 2403-10 (first 2) Change to 2). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2403-6 (second modification 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-10 (second modification 2). As described above, in the second modified example from the second embodiment, in the sorting game execution round related to the first main game symbol, the easy entry not-notification effect is executed, and the distribution game related to the second main game symbol is executed. In the execution round, it is configured to execute the easy entry notification effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be made different depending on the gaming state, which effect is executed, that is, the easy entry non-notification effect or the easy entry notification effect. For example, in the distribution game execution round related to the long open big hit (5A, 7A) on the first main game side elected in the non-time shortening game state and the non-stochastic game state, In the distributed game execution round related to the long open big hit (3B / 5B / 7B) on the second main game side won in the time shortening game state and the probability variation game state, it is configured to execute the easy entry notification effect. Also good. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute the ending effect as described above in this embodiment, and in such a case, it is not easy to enter the ball during the special game that executes the ending effect. It is preferable that the effect and the easy entry notification effect are displayed so as not to stand out for the player. With such a configuration, attention can be paid more to an ending effect having a high degree of difficulty. Similarly, it is configured to enable execution of an on-reserved rensou effect that informs the player that there is a hold that is a big hit among the suspends that are present in the special game. Even when it is executed, it may be configured to display the easy entry non-notification effect and the easy entry notification effect so as not to stand out for the player.

  Next, in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game being executed is a special game related to the second main game length opening big hit symbol ( The second main game length opening jackpot symbols are 3B, 5B and 7B). If YES in step 2403-10 (second modification 2), the flow advances to step 2416. On the other hand, if step 2403-10 (second variation 2) is No, in step 2403-11 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the winning number (short open). In the case of a big hit where there is a round, the number of rounds is not notified), and the process proceeds to step 2426. As described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the second main game length opening big hit symbol, which is a big hit symbol in which the first big winning port C10 or the second big winning port C20 becomes long open in all rounds. In the big hit, the round that is being executed is notified at the time of execution of each round (the number of rounds currently being executed is notified), while the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize is received in any round In the big hit with the short opening of the mouth C20 (or in the big hit with the first big winning opening C10 having a short opening), the round currently being executed is not notified when each round is executed. Further, when not informing of the round being executed, an object image (for example, a treasure box, etc.) corresponding to the number of rounds (actual number of rounds) is displayed instead of the display of informing the round. You may comprise so that it may display additionally every time the round which becomes long open of the big prize opening C20 is performed. Also, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of object images are displayed at the start of a special game (or immediately after the start of a special game), and an effect is ensured to ensure that the number of rounds corresponding to the number of the object images is long open. May be. In addition, when the special game in which all the rounds are long open, the effect may not be executed or may be executed, but if not executed, the number of currently executed rounds is displayed. It is desirable. In any round, in the big hit where the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20 is short open (or in the big hit having a round in which the first big prize opening C10 is short open) The first grand prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20 may be configured to notify only the number of rounds that are long open (for example, “first R = long open, second R = short open, third R = long). In the case of “open”, the third round is notified of the second round, etc.). It should be noted that the performance performed during the execution of the special game is not limited to this, for example, a big hit within the hold in a predetermined round (or a distribution game execution round) after the distribution game execution round during the execution of the special game If there is a hold that becomes a big hit, it may be configured to execute a hold-in-resort directing effect that notifies that it is decisive that it will be a big hit or that there is a high possibility of a big hit. In the case of such a configuration, when the on-hold consecutive resort production is executed in the round before the distribution game execution round, the game state after the end of the special game is not determined (to the specific area C22). Therefore, there is a possibility that the symbol variation related to the hold subject to notification will be lost, even though the big hit is announced. The execution timing of the villa effect is preferably after entering the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round or after the distribution game execution round is completed. In addition, the distribution game execution round may be any round, for example, the first round may be configured as the distribution game execution round (applicable even when there is one big prize opening). .

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the start demonstration effect execution process according to the subroutine of Step 2350 (second modification 2) of FIG. 49 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the second long release command is received from the main side. If Yes in step 2352, the process proceeds to step 2360. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first long release command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S informs that the final prize winning lottery C20 is long open in the special effect execution lottery to be won at 1/5 (in the special game being executed). Or a lottery). Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the confirmed effect execution lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2358, the process proceeds to step 2360. Next, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a long release confirmation notification effect (the effect of notifying that the second big prize opening C20 is long open in the special game being executed) as a start demonstration effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 2403-4 (second modification 2)}. In the case of No in step 2354 (when the first short release command is received from the main side) or in the case of No in step 2358, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the long release is present as the start demonstration effect. The notification effect (the effect that does not notify whether the second big prize opening C20 is long open or short open in the special game being executed) is executed, and the next process {the process of step 2403-4 (second modification 2)} Migrate to Also, in the special game start demo time at which the start demonstration effect will be executed, similarly to the distribution start demo time, the first main game side jackpot (of which a high percentage) is 10 seconds, the second main game You may comprise so that it may be 3 seconds in the big hit (a high ratio) of the side.

  By configuring as described above, in the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, in the special game related to the second main game side, the second big prize opening in the distribution game execution round in all special games In the special game related to the first main game side where C20 is long open, a special game in which the second big prize opening C20 is long open and a special game in which a short open is provided in the distribution game execution round, In the special game on the second main game side, the fact that the second big prize opening C20 is open for a long time is announced at the start demonstration time of the special game, while in the special game on the first main game side, the second big prize is won. Even if it is a special game in which the mouth C20 is opened for a long time, it is configured to have a case in which a notification is made that the second big prize opening C20 is to be opened in the special demonstration start time. It is certain to enter the specific area C22 Or in the special game on the second main game side where it is easy to enter the game, the player is informed that the second big prize opening C20 will be opened for a long time, while it is confirmed that the player will enter the specific area C22 during the special game. In the special game on the side of the first main game where it is not easy to enter the ball, the player basically performs an effect asking the player whether or not the second grand prize opening C20 will be opened for a long time. It is possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine capable of performing an effect corresponding to the ease of entering the specific area C22 by configuring so that there is a case where the possibility of long opening is high. it can.

  In the second modification from the second embodiment, it is configured that the easy entry notification effect and the easy entry non-notification effect are executed at the distribution start demonstration time, but before the distribution game execution round. It may be executed during execution of a round to be executed (may be executed over a plurality of rounds) or may be executed during execution of a sorting game execution round.

(Third embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the game ball is placed in the specific area C22 during the special game so that the game shifts to the probability variation game state after the special game ends. The game performance that is highly profitable for the player by entering the ball is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that provides such game play is defined as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a basic structure of the front side of a gaming machine in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the third embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and due to the presence of the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port A10 is arranged. The upper part of the game start opening B10 is blocked. Both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) are both the second main game start opening B10. The game ball that is guided to the left and flows down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced at the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, and the game that flows down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced at the center of the game area) The ball is configured not to be guided to the first main game start opening A10. Note that both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) are the first main game start opening A10. You may comprise so that it may be induced | guided | derived to.

  In addition, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start opening A10, but is difficult to be guided to the second main game start opening B10. While the game balls flowing down on the right side (based on the center of the game area) are difficult to be guided to the first main game start port A10, the respective start ports are arranged so as to be easily guided to the second main game start port B10. Good. It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively.

  Here, in the third embodiment, the auxiliary game start port H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced from the center of the game area) is easily guided and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30. {However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is configured so that the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. (For example, auxiliary game start ports H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30, respectively.)}.

  Next, a first grand prize winning port C10 and a second grand prize winning port C20 are arranged on the upper right side of the out port D36. Before reaching the out opening D36, it is configured to easily pass through an area where the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged.

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. The winning opening corresponding to the main game is located at the upper right of the opening D36 and at the upper right of the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second big prize opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second big prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second big prize). The mouth solenoid C26), the upper shielding member C24 that can start driving at the start of the small hit game and hinder the flow of the gaming ball to the lower shielding member C25, and the driving when the gaming machine is turned on The lower shielding member C25 that can hinder the flow to the V winning opening C27, the V winning opening C27 that is an opportunity to shift to the special game by entering the ball at the small hit game, and the V winning opening C27 A V winning opening entrance detecting device C27s for detecting the entrance of a game ball, a second large winning opening outlet C23 for discharging a gaming ball that has entered the second large winning opening C20, and a second large In order to detect a game ball entering the winning port outlet C23 Comprising a second bonus prize hole discharge detection device C23S, a. Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable in a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10). The internal structure of the second big prize opening C20 will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 52 is an operation diagram relating to the second big prize opening C20 in the third embodiment, and more specifically, the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding provided in the second big prize opening C20. It is an operation view related to whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 based on the opening mode and the closing mode of the member C25. In the third embodiment, if the game ball continues to be fired toward the second grand prize opening C20 during the small hit game (if it continues to hit the right), the second big prize opening C20 is entered. The game ball is configured to enter a plurality of balls {for example, the second big prize opening C20 (second big prize mouth electric accessory C21d) is opened as “0.2 second open → 0.8 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed ”. Therefore, whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 depends on whether the game ball in the second large winning opening C20 is the upper shielding member C24 or not. It is determined by whether or not the opening timing with the lower shielding member C25 matches well. Hereinafter, the action of the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening C20 during the small hit game will be described in detail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the second grand prize opening C20 has an inside (as a flow path of a game ball inside the second big prize opening C20) and enters the second big prize opening C20. The second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the ball, the V winning opening C27, the V winning opening winning detection apparatus C22s for detecting the winning at the V winning opening C27, and the V winning opening C27 are not entered. A second grand prize port outlet C23, which is a discharge path for the game balls, and a second big prize port discharge detection device C23s for detecting a ball entering the second major prize port outlet C23, A lower shielding member C25 provided above the V winning opening C27 and an upper shielding member C24 provided above the lower shielding member C25. The upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are separated from the game board ( Projected state (advanced state) as seen from the player Therefore, the fall of the game ball is not inhibited by the closed state in which the fall of the game ball can be or can be easily inhibited and the state in which the game ball is retracted into the game board (the back side when viewed from the player). It is configured to be able to take an open state where it is possible or difficult to block (a game ball can drop) (this is a configuration like a so-called Vero-type attacker). More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the upper shielding member C24 is in the closed state, the game ball cannot reach or is difficult to reach the lower shielding member C25, and when the upper shielding member C24 is in the opened state. The game ball can reach or easily reach the lower shielding member C25, and when the lower shielding member C25 is closed, the game ball cannot reach or reach the V winning opening C27, and the lower shielding member When C25 is in the open state, the game ball is configured to reach or easily reach the V prize opening C27. Next, a specific flow path of a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening C20 during the small hit game will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening C20 during the small hit game has passed through the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s and is then closed in the closed state. It is guided to the member C24, and stops (is placed on the upper shielding member C24) in a region formed by the upper shielding member C24 and the inner wall surface of the second large winning opening C20 (referred to as a retaining region). In the present embodiment, since the stopping area is configured so that only one game ball can be placed, as shown in FIG. 52A, a certain game ball is placed in the stopping area. When the game ball is placed, the game ball guided into the second grand prize opening C20 after the placement timing of the game ball collides with the game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24. Thus, the flow path reaching the second grand prize port outlet detection device C23s and the second major prize port outlet C23 without passing through the upper shielding member C24 (it is impossible or difficult to enter the V prize port C27). The stopping area is configured such that the certain game ball is not pulled out of the stopping area due to an impact when the other game ball collides. Have been). Here, the right part of FIG. 52 (a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the XX cross section in FIG. 52 (a). As shown in the sectional view, in FIG. 52 (a), the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are both closed (projected from the game board (toward the player as viewed from the player)) (the sectional view). In this case, it is understood that a game ball can be placed on the upper shielding member C24.

  In the third embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 is set so as to be opened after a certain time from the start of the small hit game (in this example, five seconds after the start of the small hit game). C25 is configured to repeat the transition between the closed state and the open state at a constant cycle (in this example, a cycle of 4 seconds) from when the power is turned on (the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 is periodic). Below, whether or not to enter the V winning opening C27 is mainly determined by the timing at which the upper shielding member C24 is opened (in other words, the timing at which the small hit game starts) (the lower shielding member C25 has the lower shielding member C25). The game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 when the small hit game is started in which the timing when the upper shielding member C24 is opened substantially coincides with the timing when the upper shielding member C24 is opened.

  The third embodiment is merely an example, and the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are in a state in which the fall of the game ball cannot be inhibited or difficult, and in a state in which the fall of the game ball can be inhibited or easily inhibited. As long as the transition can be made, any structure may be used, and other configurations are not limited at all.

  In the third embodiment, the two shielding members, the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25, are provided to inhibit the game ball from entering the V winning opening C27. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that the entrance of the game ball to V winning opening C27 may be inhibited with a shielding member. Also, in the gaming machine shown in the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the specific area is changed to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is finished. You may comprise so that the shielding member which inhibits the entrance of the game ball to C22 may be provided. In such a configuration, the opening mode of the shielding member may be configured to differ depending on the jackpot symbol that triggered the jackpot, and in such a configuration, (1) shielding in the distributed game execution round As a member release mode, the shielding member changes from the closed state to the open state 50 ms after the distribution game execution round start timing or at the distribution game execution round start timing regardless of the big hit symbol. (2) Distribution game execution round The shielding member may be changed from the open state to the closed state at a timing 200 ms after the end timing of (or depending on the jackpot symbol, there may be a case after 200 ms or after 3000 ms). Due to the fact that there is a timing for the shielding member to be released regardless of the big hit symbol, the shielding part is started after the distribution game execution round is started. There can be first than the period until the start of the opening, towards the period from the distribution game execution round is completed until the shielding member is last in closing is configured to be a long period of time.

  Next, FIG. 53 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M in the third embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 1700 (third), step 1750 (third), step 3450 (third), and step 1950 (third). That is, after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 1700 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1750 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an upper shielding member drive control process which will be described later. Next, in step 3450 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a lower shielding member drive control process described later. Next, in step 1950 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a V winning opening entrance determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1997.

  Next, FIG. 54 shows the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 53 in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart. The difference from this embodiment is step 1403 (third), 1410-3 (third), step 1434 (third) and step 1436 (third), that is, step 1403 (third). The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variation start condition is satisfied (in the third embodiment, the fact that the small hit game is not being executed is added as the variation start condition). If yes in step 1403 (third), the process proceeds to step 1405. If no, the process proceeds to step 1419. In step 1410-2, after determining the stop symbol related to the main game symbol, in step 1410-3 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game side random number, the lottery result, and the game state. A variation mode (or variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

  If the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol in step 1430, in step 1434 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1434 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag in step 1436 (third), and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1434 (third), the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, FIG. 55 (the main game table 1 and the main game table 2) is an example of the first main game success lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success lottery table MN11ta-B) in the third embodiment. It is. In the third embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the table contents to be referred to are different only depending on whether the symbol variation related to the first main game side or the symbol variation related to the second main game side. Yes. The first main game side and the second main game side are configured to be able to win a small hit, and the result of the lottery on the second main game side is almost (with a probability of 1020/1024). Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. In addition, when winning a small hit, the first main game side is determined to be one type, and the second main game side is determined so that one main game symbol is determined as a small hit symbol from two types of main game symbols. ing. Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lose symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. When the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the state and the selection rate of the variation mode and / or the selection rate of the main game symbol are different from those before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (third) in FIG. 16 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1681-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by entering the V winning opening C27 (in the third embodiment, the small hit A special game is configured to be executed when a game ball enters the V prize opening C27 during the game). In the case of Yes in step 1681-1, in step 1681-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a jackpot symbol in which the stop symbol shifts to a time-short jackpot symbol (time-saving game state after completion of the execution of the special game. Then, it is determined whether or not 4B · 5A · 5B · 7A · 7B). In the case of Yes in Step 1681-2, the process proceeds to Step 1681-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1681-1, in step 1681-4, the CPUMC of the main control circuit board M makes a transition to the time-reduced game state after the completion of the execution of the special game. It is a small hit symbol that triggers the transition to, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by 7AK · 7BK). If Yes in step 1681-4, the process proceeds to step 1681-5.

  Next, in step 1681-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number (in this example, 100 times) to the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in Step 1681-6 and Step 1681-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next processing {Step 1700 (third) processing}. To do. In the case of No in step 1681-2, in other words, when the stop symbol is 4A, which is a short-time and big hit symbol, or in the case of No in step 1681-4, in other words, 2BK which is a short and short-time symbol, is triggered. Even when the special game is over, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1700 (third) process}. Note that the processing related to the limited frequency (step 1411, subroutine of step 1450, step 1413, step 1431) has been deleted.

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1700 (third) in FIG. 53 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1701, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a discharge waiting flag {a flag that is turned on in step 1722, which will be described later, that is, a scheduled small hit game (especially the second large game that was scheduled). Whether or not the flag turned on during the discharge waiting period (discharge waiting time) of the game balls remaining in the second large winning opening C20 after the completion of the execution of the winning opening C20 opening pattern) is off. Determine. If Yes in step 1701, in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If YES in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, at step 1705, the CPUMC of the main control board M releases the opening pattern of the second big prize opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, “0.2 second release → 0. 8 seconds closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed ”, and if the game ball continues to be fired toward the second grand prize opening C20, the game ball is placed in the second big prize opening C20. Set up to enter multiple balls). Next, in step 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPUMC of the main control board M launches a small-hit execution start command (a command indicating that a small-hit game has been started, and the player releases a game ball toward the second big prize opening C20. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening C20 and starts the small hit game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1709, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the discharge waiting timer MP41t-2 (increment timer), and proceeds to step 1712. In the third embodiment, the discharge waiting timer MP41t-2 measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, thereby discharging after a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) from the start of the small hit game. The waiting time is configured to end. {Of course, the method for measuring the discharge waiting time is not limited to this. For example, the scheduled small hit game (especially, the scheduled second big prize opening C20). Measurement may be started after the execution of the release pattern)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1712.

  Next, in step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has been won (entered) in the second major winning opening C20. In the case of Yes in Step 1712, in Step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in the second big winning opening C20. If YES in step 1714, the process proceeds to step 1718. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1712 or step 1714, in step 1716, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the small hit game timer MP41t and a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) for opening the big winning opening has elapsed. Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1716, the process proceeds to step 1718.

  Next, in step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops the driving of the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d and closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge waiting flag (the discharge waiting time is started from this processing execution timing), and the process proceeds to step 1724. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1701, the process proceeds to Step 1724.

  Next, in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value has reached the discharge standby time end value (10 seconds in this example). In the case of Yes in Step 1724, in Step 1725, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the discharge waiting timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, in step 1726, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge waiting flag. Next, in step 1728, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops and resets the small hit gaming timer MP41t. Next, in step 1730, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag and proceeds to the next process {step 1750 (third) process}. Note that the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1750 (third)} also in the case of No in step 1710, step 1716, or step 1724.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the upper shielding member drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) in FIG. 53 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the upper shielding member in a predetermined drive pattern (in this example, a pattern in which “5 seconds closed → 1 second opened → 24 seconds closed” is repeated). The driving of C24 is started, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800). Although there is no problem if the driving pattern of the upper shielding member C24 is changed, in this example, the game ball receives a V prize only when the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 coincides with the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Since it is configured to be able to enter the entrance C27, it is impossible to enter the V winning entrance C27 because the opening time is set to a long time such as 3 seconds or the opening is not released for 10 seconds or more from the start of driving. It is desirable not to configure. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, in step 1756, the CPUMC of the main control board M ends the driving by closing the upper shielding member C24 in the closed state (initial position), and the next process {step 3450 (third) Process}. As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 starts driving with the start of the small hit game (the opening of the second big winning opening C20 related to the small hit) as an opportunity, and the end of the small hit game is triggered. Is configured to end driving, and the small hitting game ends before driving once with the opening pattern of the upper shielding member C24, and the driving of the upper shielding member C24 ends. . Since the small hit game has a discharge waiting time, even after the opening of the second big prize opening C20 related to the small hit game ends, the small hit game does not end until the discharge standby time ends. It will be.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the lower shielding member drive control process according to the subroutine of step 3450 (third) in FIG. 53 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3452, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the lower shielding member C25 with a constant driving pattern (in this example, a pattern in which “3 seconds closing → 1 second opening” is repeated) after the power is turned on. , The process proceeds to {the process of step 1950 (third)}. In this way, the upper shielding member C24 is configured to start driving when the small hit game is started, whereas the lower shielding member C25 is configured to start driving when the gaming machine is turned on.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination process according to the subroutine of Step 1950 (third) in FIG. 53 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a conditional device operation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1960 described later, that is, a game ball has entered the V prize opening C27 during the discharge waiting time. In this case, it is determined whether or not the flag that is turned on in this case is off. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27. In the case of Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M within the V winning opening effective period (the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time related to the small hit game). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a V winning detection command (a command for executing a V winning detection effect to be described later) to the sub main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1960, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device operation reservation flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1997).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1952, in step 1962, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the V winning opening valid period (a period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time related to the small hit game). It is determined whether or not the process has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1962, in step 1964, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Note that if the answer is No in step 1954, step 1956, or step 1962, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Further, in the case of No in step 1956, in other words, in the case where the risk of fraudulent entry such as a game ball entering the V prize opening C27 is increased even though the small hit game is not executed, It is preferable that the error processing is appropriately performed. The number of rounds of special games related to entering the V winning opening C27 is “15R”, and the total flow of “special game related to entering the small winning game → V winning opening C27” is totaled. Then, “1R” of the number of rounds related to the small hit game and “15R” of the number of rounds related to the special game are “16R”.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, a control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 9A is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting when the gaming machine is powered on. Changes from the present embodiment are step 2001 (third) and step 2003 (third). That is, when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2001 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets and starts the power-on timer SM24t. The power-on timer SM24t is provided to grasp the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Next, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes initial processing based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, when RAM clear information is received → on the sub side) When the RAM is initialized and various information commands are received, the production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub-side RAM). Next, in step 2003 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S restores the number of holds (for example, the drawing hold counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). In addition, the information related to the performance and special symbols being executed is not restored, and the “preparing” screen is displayed until the next change starts. Thereafter, the processing shifts to a loop processing that repeatedly executes (b), which is the CPUSC repetition processing routine of the sub-control board S. Changes from the present embodiment are step 2500 (third) and step 2550 (third). That is, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described above. Next, in step 2500 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a V winning detection effect display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2400. Further, after executing the special game related display control process in step 2400, in step 2550 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a small hit game related display control process to be described later, and proceeds to step 2900. . Note that the stay stage determination process in step 2050 has been deleted.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2500 (third) in FIG. 61 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hit execution start command (a command relating to the start of the small hit game) has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prompts a right-handed instruction effect {emergence of a game ball (execution of right-handed) toward the second big prize opening C20 during the small hit game. The command related to the effect} is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900), and the process proceeds to step 2506. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2502, the process proceeds to step 2506. Next, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S notifies the player that the game ball has entered the V winning detection command (V winning port C27) from the main side. It is determined whether or not a command for executing the V winning detection effect, which is an effect of No. 1, has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the V winning detection effect (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2506, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400). The V winning detection effect is an effect of notifying the player that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27 and then a special game will be executed, so that the effect content congratulates the player. The content and the content of the effect of notifying that the player is highly profitable are desirable. For example, “V” is displayed on the effect display device SG in a full display area SG10.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the small hit game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2550 (third) in FIG. 61 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the small hitting flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hitting start command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the small hit start display (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). .

  Next, in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the small hitting medium flag, and proceeds to step 2564. Note that if No in step 2552, the process proceeds to step 2564. Next, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hit end command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2564, in step 2566, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the small hit end display (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). . Next, in step 2568, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the small hitting flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). Note that if the result is No in step 2554 or step 2564, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

(Function)
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, an operation related to winning in the V winning opening C27 in the third embodiment will be described. First, in the figure, when the hold related to the small hit occurs, the upper shielding member C24 is opened after the hold related to the small hit occurs, which is calculated based on the number of holds at the time of determining the variation time. It is an operation diagram illustrating the relationship between the time until the start (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “upper shielding member opening arrival time”) and the ease of entering the V winning opening C27. . In this example, a case where a hold related to a small hit occurs during a certain symbol change in which there are two holds related to a loss is illustrated. In this example, the reservation order of the reservation is “first hold → second hold → third hold” (the third hold is a hold related to the small hit). In the following, the time from the occurrence of the third hold (= hold for small hits) to the end of the changing symbol fluctuation is the same (2 seconds), and the first hold of the symbol change start of the change The random number of the fluctuation mode determination random number of the first hold to the third hold is the same (for example, the random number value of the change mode determination random number of the first hold and the second hold is 799, and the change mode determination random number of the third hold Is a random value of 1023).

  First, when a hold related to a small hit occurs during a symbol change where there are two holds related to a loss, the upper shielding member release arrival time is caused by a third hold (= hold related to a small hit). The time until the end of the changing symbol change from the first to the second; the first hold time; the second hold time; the third hold (= holding related to small hits); the small hit game start And the time from when the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started to the total time.

  Next, while referring to the table at the top of the figure, there are two holds related to loss (first hold and second hold). In the situation where it occurred, as a pattern A, when the release of the game ball was stopped after the occurrence of the third hold (= holding related to the small hit) {particularly after the third hold (= holding related to the small hit) occurred When no new hold occurs} When the upper shielding member release arrival time and pattern B continue to fire game balls after the occurrence of the third hold (= hold for small hits) {in particular, the third The upper shielding member opening arrival time is illustrated as an example of a case where a new hold occurs after a hold (= hold related to small hits) occurs.

  In the pattern A, after the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) occurs, no new hold occurs, and when the variation time related to the first hold is determined, the number of hold is two {second hold and second hold 3 hold (= hold for small hits)}, and at the time of determining the variation time for the second hold, the number of holds is 1 {third hold (= hold for small hits)}, and the third hold (= At the time of determination of the variation time related to (holding related to small hits), the number of holdings is 0. In this case, referring to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table in FIG. 11, the time from the occurrence of the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) to the end of the changing symbol variation is 2 seconds. The fluctuation time of the first hold is 5 seconds; the fluctuation time of the second hold is 10 seconds; the change time of the third hold (= holding related to the small hit) is 60 seconds; The time from the start until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is 5 seconds; therefore, the upper shielding member opening arrival time is 82 seconds.

  Next, in pattern B, after the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) occurs, two new holds occur after the start of the first hold symbol change and before the start of the second hold symbol change. When the variable time for the first hold is determined, the number of holds is 2 {second hold and third hold (= hold for small hits)}, and when the variable time for the second hold is determined Are three {third hold (= holds related to small hits) and two newly generated hold}, and the number of holds is 2 at the time of determining the variation time related to the third hold (= holds related to small hits) (2 newly generated holds). In this case, referring to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table in FIG. 11, in pattern B, after the third hold (= holding related to the small hit) occurs, the changing symbol variation is ended. The second hold time is 5 seconds; the second hold time is 5 seconds; and the third hold time (= hold for small hits) is 60 seconds. Yes; the time from the start of the small hit game until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is 5 seconds; therefore, the upper shielding member opening arrival time is 77 seconds.

  Here, as described above, the ease of entering the V winning opening C27 (whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C27) depends on the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Is determined by whether or not the two match well. That is, by referring to the upper shielding member opening arrival time and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25, whether or not it is easy to enter the V winning opening C27 in the small hit game according to the pattern A and the pattern B. It is possible to determine in advance.

  Next, the lower part of the figure shows an open mode (closed mode) of the upper shielding member C24 and an open mode (closed mode) of the lower shielding member C25 in each of the pattern A and the pattern B (the lower shielding member C25 is a power source). It is a timing chart showing that opening and closing are repeated periodically from the time of charging. In this timing chart, the elapsed time from the third holding (= holding related to the small hit) occurrence timing is illustrated with reference to the occurrence timing of the third holding (= holding related to the small hit). Moreover, as an open mode (closed mode) of the lower shielding member C25, an elapsed time from the occurrence timing of the third holding (= holding related to the small hit) is “4n + 1 (seconds)” to “4n + 2 (seconds)” (n Is an open state during the period of (integer).

  As shown in this timing chart, in the pattern A, the timing at which the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started is a timing at which 82 seconds have elapsed from the occurrence of the third holding (= holding related to the small hit), Taking into account the time required for the game ball to reach the lower shielding member C25 from the position of the upper shielding member C24 (0.2 seconds in this example), it becomes 82.2 seconds, and the 82.2 seconds is “4n + 1 (seconds)” "To" 4n + 2 (seconds) "(n is an integer). Therefore, the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 do not coincide with each other, and the gaming ball placed on the upper shielding member C24 falls due to the opening of the upper shielding member C24. When the lower shield member C25 is reached, the lower shield member C25 is not opened, so that it is difficult to enter the V winning opening C27 located downstream of the lower shield member C25 (the lower shield member C25 causes V The ball entering the winning opening C27 is easily hindered). On the other hand, in the pattern B, the timing at which the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started is a timing at which 77 seconds have elapsed from the occurrence timing of the third holding (= holding related to the small hit), and the game ball is placed in the upper shielding member C24. Taking into account the time required to reach the lower shielding member C25 from the position (0.2 seconds in this example), it becomes 77.2 seconds, and the 77.2 seconds are “4n + 1 (seconds)” to “4n + 2 (seconds)”. ”(Where n is an integer) (n = 19). Therefore, the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 coincide with each other, and when the upper shielding member C24 is opened, the game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24 falls and falls. When reaching the shielding member C25, the lower shielding member C25 is opened, so that it is easy to enter the V winning opening C27 located downstream of the lower shielding member C25 (some game balls depend on the lower shielding member C25). ) Is difficult to enter the V winning opening C27. In the case of the pattern A and the pattern B, the firing continuation instruction effect described above is executed.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, as pattern A, a new hold does not occur until the symbol variation related to the small hit starts after the hold related to the small hit occurs (the number of holds is two). In the state described above, it is difficult to start the symbol variation = the time from the occurrence of the hold related to the small hit to the start of the opening of the upper shielding member C24 tends to be long) and the pattern B as the small hit A new hold occurs from the time when the hold related to the occurrence occurs until the symbol change related to the small hit is started (the design change is easy to start while the state where the number of holds is 2 or more is always maintained = small) The opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 may change in the case where the time until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started after the holding for hitting is likely to be shortened). Further, the change in the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 can change whether or not the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 match well. In the case where a small win is won, it can be a highly entertaining gaming machine that pays attention to whether or not to enter the V winning opening C27.

  In the third embodiment, all the fluctuation times that can be executed corresponding to the number of holdings at the time of holding are confirmed based on the random number determination random number of holdings that exist at the time when the holding for the small hit occurs. Then, based on the result, the time until the upper shielding member C24 starts to be opened after the suspension for the small hit occurs in advance, the calculated result, and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25, (Furthermore, taking into account the time until the game ball reaches the lower shielding member C25 from the position of the upper shielding member C24), it is easy to enter the V winning opening C27 in the small hit game Change in the desired number of holdings (to make the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 coincide with the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25). Or) it is possible to predict. In this way, and when the entry to the V winning slot C27 is possible during execution of the small hit game related to the hold at the time of the occurrence of the hold that becomes the small hit, the combination of the variation time that can be entered It may be configured so that the player can be informed of the launching mode of the game ball (or the desired change in the number of holdings) as an effect, and by doing so, it is possible to play to the V prize opening C27 in the small hit game. It is possible to create a novel gameability in which whether or not a ball enters can be determined by a player's technical intervention.

  In addition, in 3rd Embodiment, after the holding | maintenance used as a small hit occurs by comprising so that the determined variation | change time may differ with the number of suspension | holdings at the time of determining the variation | change time of a main game symbol. The time until the lower shielding member C25 is opened can be changed, and the technical intervention of the player is possible. However, the time until the lower shielding member C25 is opened after the holding that becomes a small hit occurs. However, the configuration that can be different depending on the technical intervention of the player is not limited to this. For example, (1) When the player presses, the change of the main game symbol is forcibly stopped, and the stop symbol is displayed. A variable shortening button is provided, and the time is made different depending on the timing of pressing the button. (2) Simultaneously execute both main game symbols of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Can be drawn (and If the stop symbol related to the second main game symbol is a small hit symbol, a small hit game related to the small hit symbol is being executed. The period may be configured such that the variation time (elapsed variation time) of the first main game symbol is temporarily stopped and the time is different.

  In addition, in 3rd Embodiment, it comprises so that it may have a specific entrance where a small hitting game will be started when a game ball enters after a small hitting symbol stops, and while a small hitting symbol stops, When a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific small hit symbol is stopped, etc.) is satisfied, the timing at which the game ball is launched so that the game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 during execution of the small hit game. Can be executed on the effect display device SG (for example, “If you enter the specific entrance now, it will be displayed as a great chance to enter the V prize opening !!”). You may comprise.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the specific game state has a probability variation game state in which the winning / failing lottery result is advantageous to the player as compared with the non-probability variation game state, and the second grand prize in the special game. The game is configured to have a distribution game execution round that is a round that the mouth C20 opens, and by entering the V winning opening C27 during the distribution game execution round, the state shifts to the probability-variable game state after the special game ends. It may be configured as described above (so-called tamasho game as exemplified in the second embodiment). In addition, in such a configuration, the game ball is fired at a timing that allows a game ball to enter the V winning opening C27 in the distribution game execution round in the round before the distribution game execution round. It is desirable to be able to execute an effect that informs the player (for example, on the effect display device SG, “If you enter the second big prize opening now, it will be displayed as a big chance of probability!”). .

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, an example is given of the gameability in which a special game is executed when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit game. It is not limited to only the third embodiment. Therefore, a configuration having a game characteristic in which a special game is executed when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during a small hit game different from the third embodiment is changed from the third embodiment. Only Example 1 will be described in detail below with respect to changes from the third embodiment.

  First, FIG. 65 is a main flowchart showing a main game symbol display process in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. In step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)}, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) related to the subroutine, and performs the following process ( The process proceeds to step 1550). In addition, the gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment is configured to be in the order of entering the ball (the order in which the suspension occurs is digested from the previous one).

  Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 65 in the first modification of the third embodiment. First, the change from the third embodiment is step 1405-1 (third variation 1), that is, if the variation start condition is satisfied in step 1403, step 1405-1 (third variation 1). Then, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads the main game side random number related to the hold that occurred most recently among the holds that have occurred (all holds on the first main game side and the second main game side). The process proceeds to step 1406.

  Next, FIG. 67 is the main game table 3 according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. In the first modification from the third embodiment, in the time-reduced gaming state, the average value of the variation time related to the first main game side is larger than the average value of the variation time related to the second main game side. It has been a long time. In the time-reduced gaming state, the shortest variation time related to the first main game side is longer than the shortest variation time related to the second main game side. That is, in the time-reduced gaming state, the average value of the fluctuation time related to the big hit on the first main game side is longer than the average value of the fluctuation time related to the big hit on the second main game side. In the time-reduced gaming state, the shortest variation time related to the big hit on the first main game side is longer than the shortest variation time related to the small hit on the second main game side.

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process in step 1500 in FIG. 66 in the first modification of the third embodiment. Changes in the first modification of the third embodiment are step 1530 (third modification 1) to step 1542 (third modification 1), that is, after turning off the auxiliary game short time flag in step 1518, step 1530 is performed. In (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the second main game short-time counter (a counter that is subtracted only at the end of symbol variation of the second main game symbol) to zero, and step 1532 (third variation). Move to 1). In addition, also when it is No at step 1510, it transfers to step 1532 (3rd modification 1).

  Next, in step 1532 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the second main game short-time counter is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1532 (second variation 1), in step 1533 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed symbol variation is a variation on the second main game symbol side. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1533 (third variation 1), in step 1534 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the second main game short-time counter value by 1. . Next, in step 1536 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game short-time counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1536 (third variation 1), in step 1538 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1540 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game short time flag. Next, in step 1542 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the time reduction counter to zero, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1550). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1532 (third variation 1), step 1533 (third variation 1), or step 1536 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1550). As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the time-count counter value is subtracted between the change of the first main game symbol and the change of the second main game symbol, and only the change of the second main game symbol. The second main game short-time counter value is subtracted.

  Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of Step 1650 (third) in FIG. 15 in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are step 1682-1 (third variation 1) to step 1682-4 (third variation 1), that is, in step 1681-1, the player enters the V winning opening C27. If it is not after the end of the special game as an opportunity, in step 1682-1 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a stop symbol that is a long / short / big hit symbol (a big hit symbol with a relatively large number of short / short times). In this example, 4B, 5A, 5B, 7A, and 7B) are determined. If YES in step 1682-1 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1681-5, and if NO in step 1682-1 (third variation 1), in other words, the stop symbol is a short-time and short-term hit symbol ( In this example, in the case of 4A), the CPUMC of the main control board M is elected in the current non-time-saving game state in the case of 4A). It is determined whether or not the special game has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1682-2 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times) as the time reduction number counter value. Next, in step 1682-4 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (10 times in this example) as the second main game short time counter value, and step 1681-6 Migrate to If the answer is No in step 1682-2 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1681-5. By configuring in this way, when winning a short time bonus game in a non-time-reduced game state, the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game is the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The game symbol is configured to end when either the total number of game symbol variations is 30 or the second main game symbol variation is 10 times. In addition, if you win a short-time bonus game in the time-reduced game state (including the time-reduced game state after the special game related to the short-time short-term bonus game), 100 time-reduced game states after the end of the special game (The sum of the number of times of variation of the first main game symbol and the number of times of variation of the second main game symbol ends at 100 times).

  By configuring as described above, when the short and short bonus winning symbol is won, the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game includes the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the number of changes in the second main game symbol. The second main game side in the time-reduced game state is configured to end when either the total of 30 times or the variation number of the second main game symbol becomes 10 times is satisfied. In the case of a game that is changed 10 times by the symbol variation of the first game, even if the symbol variation on the first main game side is mistakenly executed, the second main game short time counter does not subtract, By configuring so that the game can be continued without losing the right to be changed ten times by the symbol change on the main game side, a more user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained.

(Fourth embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the game is such that the special game is started by entering the V winning opening C27 during the small hit, but the configuration of the gaming machine providing the small hit is limited to this. Not. Therefore, a configuration having a small hit different from the third embodiment is referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 70 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is that there is one large winning opening, and the V winning opening C27, the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are not provided, so that the shielding member driving process and the V winning opening C27 are different. That is, the entry determination process is not executed.

  Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 70 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is step 1249 (fourth), that is, when the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol in step 1230, in step 1249 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M is Based on the winning symbol and the gaming state, the release mode of the electric accessory is determined, a predetermined time is set in the release timer MP54t, and the process proceeds to step 1234.

  Next, FIG. 72 shows the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 8 in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart. The difference from the third embodiment is 1410-3 (fourth), step 1500 (fourth), and step 3350 (fourth). That is, after the stop symbol is determined in step 1410-2, step 1410- 3 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol determination lottery result, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), the game state, Based on the set limited frequency type, the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to Step 1414. In addition, after the condition device flag is turned on in step 1432, or after the small hit flag is turned on in step 1436 (third), or in step 1434 (fourth), the stop symbol is not a small hit symbol (losing) If it is a symbol), in step 1500 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process to be described later. Next, in step 3350 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency end determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 73 (main game table 3) is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) in the fourth embodiment. is there. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the main game symbol variation mode (variation time) is determined based on the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result, the main game short time flag state, and the limited frequency type that is set. It is configured to be. That is, when the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time becomes relatively long, and when the main game short flag is on (relative to the short game state) The variation mode in which the variation time is short is easily determined. Further, as shown in the variation mode at the time of losing and small hit, when the second limited frequency is set (for example, after the special game related to the big hit symbol “7B”), the zero limited frequency, The first limited frequency is set so that a relatively short variation mode is selected as compared with the case where the first limited frequency is set (for example, after the special game related to the big hit symbol other than the big hit symbol “7B”). In particular, in the case of small hits, the difference in the variation time between the second limited frequency and the first limited frequency is large, and the difference is the second limited frequency and the first limited when lost. It is relatively larger than the difference of the fluctuation time (average value) at the time of frequency. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, it is not configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls, but needless to say, it may be configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. Absent. Furthermore, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game short time flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol on the second main game side When the variation is configured to be advantageous for the player, the second main game side is likely to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished}. In addition, although the variation mode related to the small hit on the first main game side is configured with only one type, it is not limited thereto, and a plurality of types of variation modes may be provided (particularly, the game state and the set). It is preferable that a different variation mode can be selected based on the limited frequency type being used).

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 1500 (fourth) in FIG. 72 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1508, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1508, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value (remaining short time count) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in step 1516 and step 1518, and proceeds to the next processing {step 3350 (fourth) processing}. To do. Note that, also in the case of No in step 1508, step 1510, or step 1514, the processing proceeds to the next processing {step 3350 (fourth) processing}.

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of limited frequency end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3350 (fourth) in FIG. 72 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c (a counter that manages the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol in the limited frequency state) is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 3352, in step 3354, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 3356, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value (remaining limited frequency count) of the limited frequency counter MN52c is zero.

  In the case of Yes in step 3356, in step 3358, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the currently set limited frequency type is the second limited frequency. In the case of Yes in step 3358, in step 3360, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first limited frequency as the limited frequency type. Next, in step 3362, the CPUMC of the main control board M has the first specific number of times (for example, 65535 times as the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, but continues the first limited frequency until the next big hit. There may be an extremely large value or ∞ times other than this), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). As described above, when a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 70 times described later) has elapsed in the second limited frequency state, the first limited frequency state is entered.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3358, that is, in the 0th limited frequency state (excluded because it is not realistic that the first limited frequency state ends), a predetermined number of fluctuations (described later, for example, 50 If the number of times is equal to the upper limit of the time-saving gaming state, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set limited frequency type (substantially simultaneously, the time-saving gaming state). And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). In addition, also when it is No at step 3352 or step 3356, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 (fourth) in FIG. 15 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1653-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is a probability variation big hit symbol (for example, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1653-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1655-2.

  Next, in step 1653-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is a specific jackpot symbol (for example, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1653-3, in step 1653-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the second limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stores in the RAM area). Next, in step 1653-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the second specific number of times (for example, 70 times) as the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1653-11. In this example, it is configured to shift to the second limited frequency state (a state advantageous to the player) only at the end of the special game related to the big hit on the second main game side, but is not limited to this. . However, by configuring the second main game side so that it is easier to shift to a state advantageous to the player than the first main game side, it is possible to The advantageous state and the effect overlap, and the excitement of the player can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1653-3, in step 1653-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stores in the RAM area). Next, in step 1653-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M says that the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is the first specific number of times (for example, 65535 times, but continues the first limited frequency until the next big hit. (It may be an extremely large value or ∞ times other than the above), and the process proceeds to step 1653-11.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1653-1, that is, when the special game related to the non-probable big hit is over, in step 1653-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the predetermined number of times as the value of the time-count counter MP52c. (For example, 50 times) is set. Next, in step 1653-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the 0th limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stores in the RAM area). Next, in step 1653-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the 0th specific number of times (for example, 50 times equal to the number of time reductions) as the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1653-11 To do. That is, the first limited frequency or the second limited frequency is set when shifting to the probability varying gaming state, and the zeroth limited frequency is set when not shifting to the probability varying gaming state.

  Next, in steps 1653-11 and 1653-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short flag and the auxiliary game short flag, and proceeds to the next processing (step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the fourth embodiment. In this example, for convenience of explanation, an example in which a small hit is regularly generated at an average fluctuation interval (a small hit occurs once in about 11 fluctuations) is given. In addition, the launch interval of the game balls according to the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds per ball (100 balls per minute). Three game balls are supposed to enter the big prize opening C10.

  First, as shown in the section (a) of the figure, in the non-stochastic fluctuation / non-time-reduced gaming state, the difference between the number of game balls fired and the winning ball by entering the first main game start opening A10. As a result, the player's ball will gradually decrease.

  Next, as shown in the section (b) of the figure, during the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A”, the player's possession is obtained by paying out a prize ball by entering the big prize opening C10. The sphere will increase. Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5A” is finished, the gaming state becomes a probability variation / time shortening game state, and the first limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

  Next, as shown in the section (c) of the figure, in the probability variation / time-reduced gaming state (first limited frequency), the small hit is with a probability of 97/1024 (= about once every 11 variations). Occurring and paying out the winning ball to the big winning opening C10 related to the small hit, the player's ball is increased (slowly increasing compared to the above-mentioned special game). Here, in the section (c), 33 symbol variations are executed in about 65 seconds (about 117 winning balls are obtained by 3 small hits).

  Next, as shown in the section (d) of the figure, during the special game related to the big hit symbol “7B”, the player's possession is obtained by paying out a prize ball by entering the big prize opening C10. The sphere will increase. Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “7B” is ended, the game state becomes a probability variation / time reduction game state, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

  Next, as shown in the section (e) of the figure, in the probability variation / time-reduced gaming state (first limited frequency), the small hit is with a probability of 97/1024 (= about once every 11 variations). Occurring and paying out a winning ball to the big winning opening C10 related to the small hit, the player's ball is increased (slowly increasing compared to the above-mentioned special game). Here, in the section (e), 33 symbol variations are executed in about 23 seconds (about 117 winning balls are obtained by 3 small hits). That is, as compared with the first limited frequency, the number of prize balls won (or the expected value) by small hits in the same number of fluctuations is the same, but the time for digesting the fluctuations of the same number of fluctuations is short. Therefore, it can appear as if the player is in a highly profitable state. Although a detailed description is omitted, for example, about 108 game balls are fired in 65 seconds, and about 38 game balls are fired in 23 seconds. Therefore, the lower the rate of entry to the second main game start opening B10, the more game balls launched within the time to digest the same number of fluctuations are lost, so the second limited frequency is more than the first limited frequency It is supplemented that the profit actually becomes high for the player.

  Next, FIG. 78 is a timing chart according to the gaming state transition in the fourth embodiment. First, in the non-stochastic fluctuation / non-time shortened gaming state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the 8R special game is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol “5A”. .

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, triggered by the end of the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5A”, the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are entered, and the first limited frequency is set. Note that, during the time-reduced gaming state, basically, the variation of the second main gaming symbol is executed.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol “BK”, and the small hit game is executed (in the small hit game, the probability variation is changed). Switching between gaming state and reduced time gaming state is not performed).

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, a special game of 16R is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol “7B”. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to non-probable change (non-probability variation gaming state), and the variation time is switched to non-time reduction (non-time shortening gaming state).

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “7B” is completed, the game shifts to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and the second limited frequency is set. The Here, the state in which the second limited frequency is set (sometimes referred to as a second limited frequency state) continues for a maximum of 70 fluctuations, and the main game symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation time at the time of loss and small hit) ) Is a state that is likely to be shorter than a state in which the first limited frequency is set (sometimes referred to as a first limited frequency state). In this example, it is assumed that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 70 times (no special game is being executed) within a period of 5 to 6 in the figure.

  Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the second limited frequency state is terminated when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 70 times in the second limited frequency state, and the state shifts to the first limited frequency state.

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the 8R special game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol “4B”. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to non-probable change (non-probability variation gaming state), and the variation time is switched to non-time reduction (non-time shortening gaming state).

  Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “4B” is finished, the game shifts to a non-stochastic game state and a time-reduced game state, and the 0th limited frequency is set. (Hereafter, in this example, the time-reduced gaming state and the 0th limited frequency state will continue for a maximum of 50 fluctuations).

  By configuring as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, after the special game related to the specific jackpot symbol (in this example, “7B”), the main game symbol for a predetermined period. Will be shifted to a state (for example, the second limited frequency state) where the fluctuation time (in this example, the fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation and the small hit fluctuation) tends to be short. As a result, the fluctuation efficiency on the second main game side is increased, so that the occurrence interval of small hits (and small hit games) can be shortened, and even in the same probability fluctuation / time reduction game state, the player It is possible to create a new gameability that there is a state advantageous to the player (or a state that seems to be advantageous to the player).

  In the present embodiment, the state where the second limited frequency is set is configured to end with 70 fluctuations, but is not limited to this, and is configured to continue until the next big hit is won. Also good.

  Although not specifically shown in the present example, the production mode (the type of production system such as background production and notice production) may be made different depending on the set limited frequency type. As such a configuration, for example, when the second limited frequency is set (after the special game that will shift to the second limited frequency), the effect mode is effect mode A (for example, a night background image is displayed). When the first limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency is set (after the special game that will shift to the first limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency), the production mode is the production mode B (for example, evening The background image is displayed). In addition, in such a configuration, an effect (a night background image) that shifts from the effect mode A to the effect mode B during the symbol change in a part of the symbol change that is expected to be a big hit when the effect mode A stays. To the evening background image). Furthermore, in such a configuration, when the symbol change that is planned to be a big hit at the time of staying in the production mode A, and after the special game related to the big hit, it is scheduled to shift to the second limited frequency again, You may comprise so that possibility that the stay of presentation mode A may be maintained becomes high. In other words, in the case where an effect that shifts from the effect mode A to the effect mode B is executed, the configuration is changed to the first limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency after the special game related to the symbol variation is finished. Since the possibility of transition is increased, and this may be disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game depending on whether or not such effects are performed. That is, when such a transition to the production mode B is not performed for the transition from the production mode B to the production mode A, when the production mode B stays {(* without the mode transition, from the beginning (after the end of the last special game) To) If you are in the production mode B}, if the big hit occurs, the second limitation is relatively more than the case where the big win occurs in the production mode B with mode transition. The degree of expectation to shift to the frequency will increase, and when configured in this way, the transition to the production mode B is suggested during the stay in the production mode A as the production that makes a transition from the production mode A to the production mode B. Such an effect may be executed, and then a specific reach effect may be executed, or an effect similar to the specific reach effect may be generated when the effect mode B is staying.

  Although not specifically shown in this example, even if any limited frequency type is set, the total number of game balls entered into the big winning opening C10 at the time of a small hit game is displayed or entered The count display may be configured to be displayed on the effect display device SG. In addition, the total number of winning prize balls (small hits, during the period in which the second limited frequency is set (particularly during the period in which the second limited frequency → the special game → the second limited frequency →... Is looped)) The total number of winning balls such as big hits may be displayed on the effect display device SG. Moreover, when comprised in that way, when the 2nd limited frequency state is complete | finished (or when it transfers to the production mode B from the production mode A), the total number of acquired winning balls displayed on the production display device SG Is temporarily stored, and at the timing when the production mode in the next second limited frequency state shifts from production mode A to production mode B, the total number of winning balls displayed at the timing and the temporary storage are stored. You may comprise so that the sum with the total number of prize-winning balls may be displayed on the effect display device SG. In addition, the total number of award winning balls displayed on the effect display device SG in the second limited frequency state is displayed in addition to the number of award winning balls based on the small hits, while the 0th limited frequency state and the first In the limited frequency state, it is desirable not to display the number of winning balls for small hits (in order to make it appear that the speed of appearance is improved by the number of winning balls for small hits in the second limited frequency state) The purpose of differentiating).

  Although not specifically shown in this example, the game state (especially the time-reduced game state / limited frequency) that transitions after the end of the special game related to the same jackpot symbol depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot that triggered the special game. State) and its duration may be different. For example, in this example, after the end of the time-saving game, if the remaining second main game side holds a big hit related to the “7B” symbol, the second limited frequency is set after the special game related to the big hit is finished. You may comprise so that it may not set (for example, 1st limited frequency is set).

  Also, in this example, the transition to a state advantageous to the player (in this example, the second limited frequency state) is made only at the end of the special game related to one type of jackpot symbol, but this is not limitative. For example, a plurality of jackpot symbols that shift to a state advantageous to the player after the end of the special game may be provided. Also, in that case, the period in which the player is in an advantageous state differs depending on which jackpot symbol is hit (for example, 70 fluctuations after big hit A, 150 fluctuations after big hit B, It may be configured to be in an advantageous state. In addition, when a plurality of small hit symbols and losing symbols are provided and a specific small hit symbol or losing symbol is won, it is possible to shift to a state advantageous to the player (meaning the second limited frequency in this embodiment). It may be configured. In that case, as described above, the game state that shifts after the small hit game related to the same small hit symbol and the duration thereof may differ depending on the game state at the time of the small hit.

  In this example, when one of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the other symbol is forcibly stopped with a lost symbol. At this time, the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c are configured to be subtracted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the measurement of the variation time of the other symbol is temporarily stopped, May be configured not to subtract the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, after a big hit with the “5A” symbol on the first main game side, in the second limited frequency state, when there is no limited frequency (loss fluctuation is 10 to 60 seconds, small hit fluctuation Is 75 to 95 seconds), the variation time on the second main game side is shortened (the loss variation is 0.5 seconds and the small hit variation is 1 second). Although an example has been described in which a pseudo bonus of winning a prize ball by winning a game can be created, there are other specs of gaming machines that can be realized by a similar board configuration. For example, if the first main game side does not win a big hit with the “5A” symbol (for example, if it is a big hit with the “7A” symbol), a limited frequency state (for example, lost) that is different from the second limited frequency By configuring so that the fluctuation is shifted to 3 seconds and the small hit fluctuation is 1 to 10 seconds), the chance zone for shifting to the second limited frequency state which is a high profit state (the above-mentioned second limited frequency is It is possible to create gaming machines having different limited frequency states.

  Moreover, limited frequency A, limited frequency B, limited frequency C, limited frequency D (variation efficiency on the second main game side: A> B> C> D) are provided, and a small hit for a big hit or a specific small hit symbol is provided. As a trigger, the limited frequency type may be switched. In addition, in such a configuration, as the big hit (or a specific small hit) continues within the ST number, the variation frequency on the second main game side becomes higher (= higher player profits) limited frequency type. By configuring so as to switch (that is, there is no change efficiency rank down), it is possible to create a new gameability that increases the profitability of the player each time a consecutive home (in that case, the upper limit of the number of STs) The set limited frequency type is reset by reaching ().

  Further, in this example, the variation efficiency on the second main game side is improved by shifting to a limited frequency state in which the variation mode in which the variation time on the second main game side is short is easily selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, since the gaming machine according to the present example is a parallel lottery type gaming machine, it is configured to shift to a limited frequency state in which a variation mode in which the variation time on the first main game side is long is easily selected. You may comprise so that the relative variation efficiency (the frequency | count of execution of the 2nd main game fluctuation | variation with respect to a 1st main game fluctuation | variation) on the 2nd main game side between a 1st main game and a 2nd main game may be improved.

(Fifth embodiment)
Here, the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine having a gaming property that can enjoy both the acquisition of a prize ball by a special game and the acquisition of a prize ball by a small hit game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration specialized for winning a winning ball. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 79 is a drawing showing the basic structure of the front side of the gaming machine in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, only differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in 5th Embodiment, it is about the position and shape of 2nd main game start opening B10. In the fifth embodiment, the second main game start port B10 is provided directly below the first main game start port A10, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is connected to the first main game start port A10. It is configured to be able to enter any of the second main game start opening B10. In addition, the second main game start opening B10 has a horizontally long shape, and a game ball can always enter, and the game ball can easily enter compared to the first main game start opening A10 (in this example, The game ball is easy to enter due to the large opening through which the game ball enters (the number of prize balls for entering the second main game start opening B10 is 1).

  Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of Step 1400 (fifth) of FIG. 4 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1400 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). With this configuration, the second main game side can start to change even when the first main game side changes, and the first main game side also changes when the second main game side changes. Can start (so-called parallel lottery).

  Next, FIG. 81 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 80 in the fifth embodiment. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1407-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) variation start condition is satisfied. The change start condition is not during a special game (or during the operation of the condition device) and is not changing the first main game symbol (in the case of processing on the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbol is not changing). ) And there is a condition that the main game symbol is on hold and is not in the small hit game. That is, since the parallel lottery can be executed, when the process related to the first main game symbol is executed, there is no problem even if the second main game symbol fluctuates, but the first main game symbol is fluctuating. If there is, the variation start condition related to the first main game side is not satisfied.

  Next, in step 1407-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads the main game side random number. Next, in Step 1407-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the read main game side random number from the hold information and shifts (holds up) the remaining hold information. Next, in step 1407-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol winning lottery based on the main game side random number and the game state. Next, in step 1407-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines stop symbols related to the main game symbols based on the main game side random numbers and the result of lottery determination, and temporarily stores them in the RAM area. Next, in step 1407-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number). The main game symbol variation mode is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, in step 1407-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the information related to the determined main game symbol and the game state information (a command to the sub-control board S side, such as a symbol variation display start instruction command). ) Is set. Next, in step 1407-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines a predetermined time related to the change time of the main game symbol based on the change mode as a first main game timer MP11t-C1 (second main game timer MP11t- Set to C2) to start the timer. Next, in step 1407-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the display unit B21g), the variable display of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is started. Next, in step 1407-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to step 1407-12. On the other hand, if No in Step 1407-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) changing flag is turned on in Step 1407-11. If YES in step 1407-11, the flow advances to step 1407-12.

  Next, in step 1407-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1407-12, in step 1407-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game symbol display part A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The change display of the main game symbol on the (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped, the display control is performed as the fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to Step 1407-16. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-12, in step 1407-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag or the small hit execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1407-14, in step 1407-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game symbol display part A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on the (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped with the stop symbol as a losing symbol, and the display of the losing symbol is controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to Step 1407-16. .

  Next, in step 1407-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information to the sub-main control unit SM side that the symbol change is terminated (symbol confirmation display instruction command). Is set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1407-17, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to step 1407-18. Next, in step 1407-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1407-18, in step 1407-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-18, in step 1407-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1407-20, in step 1407-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1407-20, the process proceeds to step 1500 (fourth).

  Next, in step 1500 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the specific game end determination process described above. Next, in step 3350 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency end determination process described above, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1407-11 or step 1407-14, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 82 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the fifth embodiment. First, as shown in the section (a) of the figure, in the non-stochastic fluctuation / non-time-reduced gaming state, the number of game balls fired and the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 Due to the difference from the winning ball due to the entry, the player's ball will gradually decrease.

  Next, as shown in the section (b) in the figure, in the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A”, the big winning opening C10 is short-opened (short-time opening in which it is difficult to enter the game ball). Therefore, it is difficult to acquire a prize ball, and the number of balls held by the player does not change (or is small). Here, when the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A” is completed, the game state is changed to a probability variation / time reduction game, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

  Next, as shown in the section (c) in the figure, in the probability variation / time-reduced gaming state (second limited frequency), a small hit occurs with a probability of 1004/1024 (= almost every variation) As a result of paying out a winning ball for entering the big winning opening C10 related to the small hit, the player's holding ball increases. Note that the probability variation / time-reduced gaming state (second limited frequency) in (c) is a ST (probability variation gaming state with a limited number of times) up to 200 variations, which is a gaming state with high profitability for the player. is there.

  Next, as shown in the section (d) in the figure, in the special game related to the big hit symbol “5B”, the big winning opening C10 is short-opened (short-time opening in which it is difficult to enter the game ball). Therefore, it is difficult to acquire a prize ball, and the number of balls held by the player does not change (or is small). Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5B” is ended, the gaming state becomes a probability variation / time reduction game state, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type. In addition, since the upper limit number of the probability variation gaming state is reset, the high profit state up to 200 variations is started again.

  Next, since the section of FIG. 5E is the same as the gameability of FIG. In addition, since the jackpot symbol on the second main game side has only “5B” that resets the upper limit number of probability fluctuation gaming states, it reaches the upper limit number of probability fluctuation times (200 fluctuations in this example) (or When the first main game side wins the “7A” symbol), the probability variation / time shortening gaming state ends.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a timing chart according to the gaming state transition in the fifth embodiment. In the upper part of the figure, a case where a big hit is made with the “5A” symbol in the non-stochastic fluctuation / non-time shortening gaming state will be described as an example. In the game before 1 in the figure, the variation time on the second main game side tends to be long, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed.

  First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the 2R special game is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol “5A”. In this example, in the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A”, the special winning opening C10 is short-opened, so that it is difficult to obtain a winning ball by entering the special winning opening C10.

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5A” is completed, the game moves to a probability variation game state with a limited number of times up to 200 variations (so-called ST). A second limited frequency is set.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol “BK”, and the small hit game is executed (in the small hit game, the probability variation is changed). Switching between gaming state and reduced time gaming state is not performed). During the second limited frequency (3-4 and 5-6 in the figure), the variation time of the second main game symbol tends to be short, and the second main game side has a high probability of making a small hit, Small hit games will occur continuously.

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the 2R special game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol “5B”. In this example, in the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A”, the special winning opening C10 is short-opened, so that it is difficult to obtain a winning ball by entering the special winning opening C10. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to non-probability change (non-probability change game state).

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, triggered by the end of the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5B”, a transition is made again to a probability variation game state (so-called ST) of up to 200 variations, A second limited frequency is set.

  Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the probability varying gaming state and the second limited frequency state will be terminated when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 200 times within the period of 5-6 in the figure. . It should be noted that the games after 6 in the figure, like the games before 1 in the figure, tend to have a long fluctuation time on the second main game side, and the games on the first main game side are mainly executed. Become.

  Next, with reference to the lower part of the figure, a case where a big hit with the “7A” symbol in the non-stochastic fluctuation / non-time shortening gaming state will be described as an example. First, at the timing shown in FIG. 8A, the 8R special game is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol “7A”.

  Next, at the timing of b in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “7A” is completed, the state shifts to a probability variation game state with a limited number of times up to 200 variations (so-called ST). However, since it does not shift to the second limited frequency state, the fluctuation on the second main game side tends to be long after that, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed.

  By changing as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment can always enter the first main game start opening A10 and can always enter the ball (entering more than the first main game start opening A10) Easy) second main game starting port B10, and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be changed simultaneously. Further, when it is not in the second limited frequency state, the variation time on the second main game side tends to be long, and games on the first main game side are mainly executed. Furthermore, the second main game is configured to have a small hit with a high probability (in this example, a probability of 1004/1024). Here, when a big hit is made with a specific jackpot symbol (in this example, “5A” and “5B”), a special game related to the jackpot (in this example, a special game that short-opens the big winning opening C10). After the end of the game, it is difficult to enter the game ball), and the transition to the second limited frequency state (and the probability variation game state) where the variation time on the second main game side tends to be short is possible. By configuring as described above, the second limited frequency state is ended thereafter (in this example, the main game symbol is displayed 200 times continuously and stopped with a symbol other than the big hit, or the big hit with the “7A” symbol. A new game is created in which small hits are continuously generated until the game is completed, and winning balls are obtained by entering the winning balls A10 released by the small hits. Can do it. In addition, since it is always easy to enter the second main game start port B10, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d (so-called electric Chu) that supports entering the second main game start port B10 is provided. There is no need to provide it. As a result, the number of members and development costs can be reduced.

  In this example, when one of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the other symbol is forcibly stopped with a lost symbol. At this time, the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter 53c are subtracted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the measurement of the variation time of the other symbol is temporarily stopped, May be configured not to subtract the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter 53c.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, after a big hit with the “5A” symbol on the first main game side, in the second limited frequency state, when there is no limited frequency (loss fluctuation is 10 to 60 seconds, small hit fluctuation Is 75 to 95 seconds), the variation time on the second main game side is shortened (the loss variation is 0.5 seconds and the small hit variation is 1 second). Although an example that can create a pseudo bonus of winning a winning ball by winning a game has been described, there are other specs of gaming machines that can be realized by a similar board configuration. For example, if the first main game side does not win a big hit with the “5A” symbol (for example, if it is a big hit with the “7A” symbol), a limited frequency state (for example, lost) that is different from the second limited frequency By configuring so that the fluctuation is shifted to 3 seconds and the small hit fluctuation is 1 to 10 seconds), the chance zone for shifting to the second limited frequency state which is a high profit state (the above-mentioned second limited frequency is It is possible to create gaming machines having different limited frequency states.

  Moreover, limited frequency A, limited frequency B, limited frequency C, limited frequency D (variation efficiency on the second main game side: A> B> C> D) are provided, and a small hit for a big hit or a specific small hit symbol is provided. As a trigger, the limited frequency type may be switched. In addition, in such a configuration, as the big hit (or a specific small hit) continues within the ST number, the variation frequency on the second main game side becomes higher (= higher player profits) limited frequency type. By configuring so as to switch (that is, there is no change efficiency rank down), it is possible to create a new gameability that increases the profitability of the player each time a consecutive home (in that case, the upper limit of the number of STs) The set limited frequency type is reset by reaching ().

  Further, in this example, the variation efficiency on the second main game side is improved by shifting to a limited frequency state in which the variation mode in which the variation time on the second main game side is short is easily selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, since the gaming machine according to the present example is a parallel lottery type gaming machine, it is configured to shift to a limited frequency state in which a variation mode in which the variation time on the first main game side is long is easily selected. You may comprise so that the relative variation efficiency (the frequency | count of execution of the 2nd main game fluctuation | variation with respect to a 1st main game fluctuation | variation) on the 2nd main game side between a 1st main game and a 2nd main game may be improved.

(Sixth embodiment)
The configuration as described in the above embodiment is a gameability that allows a player to win a game by continuously generating small hit games. However, using such a concept, the gameplay is different from the above-described gameplay. Can create more playability. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only differences from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the sixth embodiment is also a modification based on the fifth embodiment, it is supplemented that any configuration shown in the fifth embodiment can be applied in the sixth embodiment. .

  Next, FIG. 84 is a drawing showing the basic structure of the front side of the gaming machine in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the sixth embodiment, in the second big prize opening C20, the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is a small hit symbol (the types of symbols will be described later). The winning opening corresponding to the main game is located in the upper right position of the out opening D36 and the upper right position of the first major winning opening C10. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C24). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening C20 are configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Variable (exciting and changing the second big prize opening solenoid C24). In the sixth embodiment, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d is a flat member like the first big prize opening electric combination C11d, but the first big prize opening electric combination C11d is variable. Unlike the embodiment, an embodiment is adopted in which the game board (game area D30) is variable in the vertical direction. In other words, the second grand prize opening electrical accessory C21d is substantially completely buried in the game board (game area D30) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a retracted state) and transparent from the game board (game area D30). A state of projecting toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as an advanced state) is taken until the board D16 comes close. Then, the second prize winning opening electric accessory C21d protrudes from the game board (the game area D30), thereby allowing the box-like member C20-1 (to this box-like member) to receive the game balls flowing down the game area D30. When the game ball that has entered enters the second grand prize opening C20), that is, when the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d is in the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20- In the case where the game ball can enter 1 (and thus in the second grand prize opening C20), while the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d takes the advanced state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extended In this case, the game ball cannot enter into the second grand prize opening C20 (this box-shaped member is substantially sealed).

  It should be noted that the specific area C22 described above in the sixth embodiment is provided in the first grand prize opening C10, and the first big prize opening C10 is opened in the distribution game execution round in the special game. During the normal round in the special game (rounds other than the distribution game execution round in the special game) and the small hit game, the second big prize opening C20 is opened.

  Regarding the game contents developed on the game board, first, a game ball launched toward the game area D30 is a flow down route (hereinafter, left-handed) formed on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). 2) or a flow down route (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right-handed route) formed on the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). Be divided. Here, the game ball that has flowed down on the left-handed route can have an opportunity to enter the left first main game start opening A10-1 or the first major winning port C10, while the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route Can get an opportunity to enter the auxiliary game starting port H10, the second big winning port C20, the right first main gaming starting port A10-2, the second main gaming starting port B10, and the first big winning port C10. Further, in the sixth embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is configured to enter the first big winning opening C10 more easily than the game ball that has flowed down on the left-handed route (“entered ball”). “Easy to play” and “Difficult to enter” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when launching 10,000 game balls on the right-handed route and the left-handed route, respectively.

  On the left-hand route (not shown), the game ball is guided or not guided toward the first main game start port A10 by a large number of game nails and windmills. However, the number of game nails and windmills is smaller on the right-handed route (although not shown) on the right-handed route (although not shown), and the game ball has a more uniform flow-like manner. take.

  More specifically, with respect to the right-handed route, first, a game ball launched aiming at the right side of the game area D30 (for example, when the launching intensity of the game ball by the launching device is maximum, also called right-handed) is Falling by its own weight by flying inside the game area D30 along the outer rail D32 and colliding with a stopper member (a member formed of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 Begin. Next, the fallen game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 immediately below it with a high probability, and then the flow path width exceeds one game ball and less than two game balls. The ball is collected to D50 (the ball is collected regardless of whether or not it has entered the auxiliary game starting port H10). Next, the game balls flowing down along the rectifying passage D50 are discharged from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, and then slightly inclined to the left in the horizontal direction, and the first stage passage D51- has a three-stage structure. After rolling on each of the first, second stage passage D51-2 and third stage passage D51-3, it is discharged toward the outlet D36.

  Here, the first stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state, while the second stage passage D51-2 and the third stage passage D51-3 are formed. The game ball passage formed of synthetic resin or the like is formed in advance by being fixed to the game board. That is, when the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first big prize opening electric combination C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 The game ball released from the ball rolls on the first stage passage D51-1 → the game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the second stage passage D51-2 → the second The game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 rolls on the third stage passage D51-3 → the game ball released from the third stage passage D51-3 is released toward the outlet D36. , And are configured to take a substantially uniform flow-down mode.

  In this way, since the game balls that have flowed down the right-handed route take a substantially uniform flow-down mode, if the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at an interval of about 0.6 seconds) When the player enters the game start opening H10 stably and the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d is in the open state (retracted state), the box-shaped member C20-1 (and the second big prize opening) When the ball enters stably in (C20) and the first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d is in an open state, the ball can be stably entered into the first big prize opening C10. Note that the first main game start port electric role that can take the retracted state and the advanced state in the space until the game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3. When the object A11-2d is provided and the first main game start opening electric accessory A11-2d enters the advanced state, the game ball can be guided toward the right first main game start opening A10-2 It is configured.

  In the case of such a configuration, the game ball released from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 strongly collides with the first stage passage D51-1, that is, the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. If this happens, there is a risk that the second grand prize winning electrical accessory C21d will be damaged. Therefore, at least at the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, a configuration for scraping the momentum of the game ball flowing down (substantially dropping) in the rectifying passage D50 is essential. In the sixth embodiment, as shown in the vicinity of the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, the wall surface of the rectifying passage D50 protrudes into the rectifying passage D50. It is configured to reduce the momentum of the game ball by dropping the ball into the zigzag. In addition, in 6th Embodiment, although it is equipped with the structure for scraping the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball which rolls on the 1st step path D51-1 with the same reason, The point will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 80 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from the fifth embodiment is step 1410-3 (sixth), the purpose of which is to adjust the big win winning probability and the small win winning probability at the time of executing the parallel lottery, as will be described later, When staying in a certain gaming state, the selection tendency (in other words, the lottery table used when lottering the varying time) for the variation time of the main game symbol is made uniform (staying in a certain gaming state) If there is, the lottery table is not changed). That is, after determining the stop symbol related to the main game symbol at step 1410-2, at step 1410-3 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol determination result lottery and the first main game content determination. Step 1407-determines the variation mode of the first (second) main game symbol based on the random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly the variation mode lottery random number), and temporarily stores them in the RAM area. Move to 7. The limited frequency end determination process {step 3350 (fourth)}, which is a process related to the limited frequency of the fifth embodiment, is deleted.

  Next, FIG. 86 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display process in the sixth embodiment. First, as a feature of the main game table 1 (a table for winning / failing lottery), the first main game side and the second main game side are both provided with a small hit, and the result of the winning / failing lottery becomes a big hit. The probability is 5/1024 for non-stochastic variation games and 7/1024 for probability variation games. In addition, the probability that the result of the winning lottery on the first main game side is a small win is 17/1024, and the probability that the result of the winning lottery on the second main game side is a small hit is 1016/1024. In addition, the probability of losing as a result of the winning decision on the first main game side is 1002/1024 in the non-stochastic variable game, and 1000/1024 in the probability varying game, and the winning lottery on the second main game side The probability of losing the result is 3/1024 for non-probability variation games and 1/1024 for probability variation games. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery result on the second main game side is configured to be a small hit. On the first main game side, in both the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, as a result of the success / failure lottery, the ratio selected is “losing ≧ small hit ≧ big winning”. On the other hand, on the second main game side, the ratio selected as a result of the lottery determination for both the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the probability variation gaming state is “small hit ≧ big hit ≧ losing”. It should be noted that on the first main game side, it is only necessary that the loss is most easily selected, and random numbers may be distributed so that “losing ≧ big hit ≧ small hit” (particularly, there is no provision for the small hit). Good). On the second main game side, it is only necessary that the small hit is most easily selected, and the random numbers may be distributed so that “small hit ≧ losing ≧ big hit”.

  Next, as a feature of the main game table 2 (symbol determination table), the first main game side is provided with a big hit symbol (4A in this example) in which the second big winning opening C20 is short open. On the other hand, the second main game side is configured not to be provided with a big hit symbol in which the second big prize opening C20 is short open. The jackpot symbol with the largest total number of winning balls in a single jackpot is “7A / 7B” in which a special game of 16R is executed, and a maximum of “2400 balls” is paid out (details) Will be described later).

  Next, as a feature of the main game table 3 (variation mode determination table), in the second main game side, in the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state (latency probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state) Regardless of the result of success or failure, only the shortest fluctuation time (in this example, 1 second) is selected. With this configuration, in the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (the latent probability varying state with a so-called non-electric support state), if the right hand is executed, the small hits are continuously repeated at short intervals. It is configured to continue winning (the effects created by this configuration will be described later). In game states (particularly, non-stochastic variation game states) other than the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state (the so-called latent probability variation state with a non-electric support state), a relatively short-term fluctuation occurs at the time of big hit. Only the time (5 seconds in this example) is selected, and only a relatively long fluctuation time (100 minutes or more in this example) is selected at the time of loss or small hit. It has become. In addition, in the normal gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state), the average variation time at the time of big hit of the second main game symbol and the normal gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state) The average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol other than the big hit time is “average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol other than the big hit time in the normal game state> the average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol in the normal game state when the big hit time The relationship is “time”. In addition, the average variation time other than the big hit of the second main game symbol in the normal gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state), and the probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (so-called non-electric support state) The average change time of the second main game symbol in the latent probability change state with the following is: “the average change time of the second main game symbol other than the big hit in the normal game state> the probability change game state and the non-time shortened game state The relationship is “average fluctuation time of 2 main game symbols”. In addition, after the timing when the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the so-called latent probability variation state with the non-electric support state) are finished, the variation time of the second main game symbol becomes extremely long, At the timing, there is a high possibility that the second main game hold remains, and there is a concern that the progress of the game may be hindered when the game is advanced by left-handed after the timing. Therefore, in order to forcibly stop the remaining suspension by losing (to digest the remaining suspension as losing), the small hit on the first main game side appears at an appropriate frequency (17/1024 in this example). (In this case, the variation time is 3 seconds). Specifically, during the change of the second main game symbol (especially during the symbol change related to the small hit symbol), the symbol change related to the small hit symbol on the first main game side ends, and the first main game side When the small hit game is started, the change of the second main game symbol is terminated by the forced stop of the change of the second main game symbol, and the second main game is terminated. It is possible to prevent the side small hit game from being executed. In addition, in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state, the variation of the first main game symbol that is fluctuating is forcibly stopped by the loss symbol by the start of the small hit game on the second main game side, In the fourth embodiment, a probability variation gaming state and a non-determination due to a variation of the main game symbol of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 200 times) in the jackpot or probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state on the second main game side. Since the game is such that the time-reduced gaming state can be ended, all the stop symbols related to the variation on the first main game side in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state are configured to be lost. . As described above, the difference in the average value of the variation time that may vary depending on the gaming state is configured such that the difference in the variation time on the second main game side is larger than the difference on the variation time on the first main game side. .

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the other main game side is changing the symbol at the timing when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped, the symbol change on the other main game side is compulsory by the lost symbol. Although it is configured to stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation of the other main game symbol is started during the variation related to a certain big hit symbol or small hit symbol, It may be configured to forcibly convert the winning / no-win lottery result of the other main game symbol into a loss and stop the variation of the other main game symbol at a variation stop timing related to a certain big hit symbol or small hit symbol.

  It should be noted that there is no problem even if the configuration of the main game table 3 (variation mode determination table) in the sixth embodiment is changed, for example, (1) a game state that is not a non-time-reduced gaming state and a probability varying gaming state. On the first main game side, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game can enter the limited frequency state. (2) When the game state is not the non-time-reduced gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, When there are many types of variation modes related to the side (for example, 100 types), and (3) a gaming state that is not a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state, the average value of the variation time pertaining to the first main gaming side is (4) Probability variation gaming state and non-time, which is a medium time (shorter than the long time on the second main game side and longer than the short time on the second main game side, for example, 30 seconds) Games that are not in a shortened gaming state In the state, the second main game side does not shift to the limited frequency state (the first main game side does not shift even if the first main game side is in the limited frequency state), (5) in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state If there is no gaming state, there are few types of variation modes on the second main gaming symbol side (for example, one type), (6) if the gaming state is not a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state, (2) When the average value of the variation time on the main game symbol side is a long time (for example, 100 minutes), (7) in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, the first main game side is limited (8) In the case of the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, there are few types of variation modes related to the first main game symbol side (not the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state) In a gaming state The number of variations is greater than the number of types of variation related to the second main game symbol side, for example, five types), (9) in the case of the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state, the first main game symbol side When the average value of the variation time is short (for example, 3 seconds), (10) in the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the second main game side does not shift to the limited frequency state. (11) In the case of the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, there are few types of variation modes related to the second main game symbol side (in the case of the gaming state that is not the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state) The number of variation modes on the second main game symbol side is larger than, for example, five types), (12) in the case of the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state, the second main game symbol side The average value of the fluctuation time is short (for example, 3 seconds) {all the configurations (1) to (12) may be satisfied at the same time or may be combined as appropriate}. Moreover, you may comprise so that all the structures of said (1)-(12) may be applied only at the time of a loss. Further, in the case of the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, the first main game side may be configured to be able to shift to the limited frequency state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and is configured as such. Thus, when the right-handed strike is executed in the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, it is possible to execute either the first main gaming starting port or the second main gaming starting port. In the case of a configuration that can enter the ball, if the transition to the limited frequency state is made, by increasing the variation time of the first main game symbol, until the first main game side wins a big hit The average time can be increased, that is, the time during which the small hits on the second main game side are continued can be increased. In addition, the predetermined condition that is the condition for shifting to the limited frequency state described above is, for example, that a specific symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol is stopped, and the cumulative number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit or small hit is a predetermined number of times. Reach, etc. Note that the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol according to the predetermined condition may be all the big hit symbols and / or all the small hit symbols, or may be a specific big hit symbol and / or a specific small hit symbol.

  Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) in FIG. 34 in the sixth embodiment. In the figure, differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail. Differences from the second embodiment are steps 1854 (sixth) to 1858 (sixth), step 1864 (sixth), steps 1888 (sixth), and 1890 (sixth). When the distribution game execution flag is off (that is, at the start of the round), in step 1854 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates that the stopped main game symbol is the long open symbol (first It is determined whether or not one big winning opening C10 is a big hit symbol that is long open, and in this example, it is 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1854 (sixth), in step 1856 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the long open pattern of the first big winning opening C10 having the specific area C22 (for example, 30 seconds). To make it easy to win a specific area C22), the process proceeds to step 1860. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1854 (sixth), in step 1858 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the short opening pattern of the first big winning opening C10 having the specific area C22 (for example, The game is opened for 0.01 seconds, making it difficult to win the specific area C22), and the process proceeds to step 1860.

  In addition, after the distribution game execution flag is turned on in step 1862, in step 1864 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first big prize opening C10 in the set release pattern. Move to 1888 (sixth). Note that if the distribution game execution flag is ON in step 1852, the process also proceeds to step 1888 (sixth). Next, in step 1888 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined number (10 in this example) has been won in the first big prize opening C10. In the case of Yes in step 1888 (sixth), in step 1890 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the first big prize opening C10, and proceeds to step 1872. In the case of No in step 1888 (sixth), the process proceeds to step 1868, and in the case of Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1890 (sixth). Further, in the second embodiment, the big prize opening opened in the distribution game execution round is the second big prize opening C20, but in the sixth embodiment, the big prize opening opened in the distribution game execution round. The mouth is the first grand prize opening C10.

  Here, the chart at the top of the figure shows the average number of winning balls for each jackpot in the sixth embodiment. As shown in the chart, in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot symbol with the largest total number of winning balls in one jackpot is “7A / 7B”, and “15 balls × 10 balls × 16R” is the maximum. “2400 balls” are paid out (the details created by this configuration will be described later). In the sixth embodiment, the distribution game execution round is “3R, 5R” in all jackpot symbols.

  Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (sixth) in FIG. 15 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1680-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1680-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined value (200 times in this example) to the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c in step 1680-2. Next, in step 1680-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1680-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1680-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol related to the finished special game is a probabilistic / time-short hit symbol (7A, 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1680-5, in step 1680-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined value A (200 times in this example) to the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and in step 1680-9. Migrate to

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1680-1, in step 1680-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol related to the finished special game is a time and big hit symbol (in this example, 4A). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1680-7, in step 1680-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number B (50 times in this example) to the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and in step 1680-9. Migrate to

  Next, in step 1680-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of Step 1700 (third)}. Even in the case of No in step 1680-5 or step 1680-7, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1700 (third) process}.

  Thus, in the sixth embodiment, when a transition is made to the probability variation gaming state, a predetermined number of variations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game related to the transition (stop of the jackpot symbol related to the special game) Thus, the probability variation gaming state ends (shifts to the normal gaming state) (so-called ST). In addition, a gaming machine that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of a special game due to the entry of a game ball into a specific area C22 provided in the first grand prize opening C10 (so-called a ball-accurate game) Machine). Also, after the special game ends when the player enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to “5A / 5B” (and the special game ends when the player enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to “4A”. In the later but basically not entering), it is configured to be in a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state (latent probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state) (No in step 1799-5). Is the case where the stop symbol is “5A / 5B” or the stop symbol is “4A”). In the sixth embodiment, if a special area C22 is entered during the special game related to the time and big hit symbol (4A) (when the main game probability change reservation flag is turned on), the probability Although it is configured to shift to the variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, the non-stochastic variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state (Step 1799- It is preferable to set a predetermined number B of 8), and a transition to the normal gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state) may be made.

  Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1700 (sixth) of FIG. 70 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1745-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1745-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag in step 1745-2. Next, in step 1745-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1745-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M has the current stop symbol as the first main game small hit symbol (the first main game side small hit symbol, in this example, AK). It is determined whether or not. If YES in step 1745-4, in step 1745-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set in the small hit game timer MP41t during the first release time (when the small hit game related to the first main game is executed). Time, in this example, 0.01 second) is set, and the flow proceeds to step 1745-8. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1745-4, in other words, if the current stop symbol is the second main game small hit symbol (the second main game side small hit symbol, in this example, BK), step In 1745-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the second opening time (the time set when executing the small hit game related to the second main game to the small hit game timer MP41t. 7 seconds). Next, in step 1745-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a small hit start command (command to the sub-control board S side) indicating that the small hit game has been started (control command transmission in step 1999). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing), and the process proceeds to Step 1745-8. Thus, in the sixth embodiment, the small hitting start command is configured to be set only when the small hitting game related to the second main game side small hitting symbol (BK in this example) is executed, It is not set when the small hit game related to the small hit symbol on the main game side (AK in this example) is executed. Therefore, when the small winning symbol on the first main game side (AK in this example) is stopped, even if the player visually recognizes the effect, it is difficult to detect the small winning combination, and it is difficult to acquire the game ball by the small winning. (Because right-handed is not executed). It should be noted that the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side is a long-term variation (100 in the second main game symbol in the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and non-time shortened game state)). (For example, the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state (the latent probability change state with a so-called non-electric support state)) When the game state is shifted from the normal game state (non-stochastic variable game state and non-time-reduced game state), it plays a role of forcibly stopping the remaining symbol variation related to the hold on the second main game side}. In addition, when the small hit game related to the first main game side small hit symbol (AK in this example) is executed, and the small hit game related to the second main game side small hit symbol (BK in this example) In any case, a small hit start command may be set. In such a case, a small hit symbol related to the first main game side (AK in this example) is set. It is desirable that the small hitting start command set at the time of executing the hit game is different from the small hitting start command set at the time of executing the small hit game related to the second main game side small hit symbol (BK in this example). For example, at the time of executing the small hit game related to the first main game side small hit symbol (AK in this example), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize on the effect display device SG (for example, the display area is small) Display the strike instruction display (may be without sound) When the small hit game related to the second main game side small hit symbol (in this example, BK) is executed, a right-handed instruction display that is easy to visually recognize (for example, has a large display area) on the effect display device SG May be displayed (may be notified by voice).

  Next, in step 1745-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening C20, starts the small hit game timer MP41t, and proceeds to step 1747-1. If NO in step 1745-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1745-9 whether the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1745-9, the process proceeds to step 1747-1.

  Next, in step 1747-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls have been won in the second grand prize opening C20. If YES in step 1747-1, the process proceeds to step 1747-3. If NO, in step 1747-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached the predetermined time by the small hit gaming timer MP41t ( It is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed. If YES in step 1747-2, the flow advances to step 1747-3. Next, in step 1747-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is the second main game small hit symbol (the second main game side small hit symbol, in this example, BK). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1747-3, in step 1747-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a small hit end command (command to the sub control board S side) indicating that the small hit game has ended (step (Send to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of 1999), and the process proceeds to Step 1747-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1747-3, in other words, even when the stop symbol is the first main game small hit symbol (the first main game side small hit symbol, in this example, AK) The process proceeds to 1747-5 (similar to the small hit start command described above, the small hit end command is also set only during the small hit game related to the second main game small hit symbol). In the sixth embodiment, the big prize opening that is opened by the small hit game is the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1747-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1747-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops the small hit gaming timer MP41t and resets (zero clear) it. Next, in step 1747-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1997). In addition, also when it is No in step 1745-9 or step 1747-2, it transfers to the following process (process of step 1997).

  Here, the chart in the upper part of the figure shows the average number of winning balls for each small hit symbol in the sixth embodiment. As shown in the chart, in the sixth embodiment, the average total number of prize balls per one small hit (that is, the expected number of game balls that a player can obtain by one small hit) is “ In the case of “AK”, the number is relatively small as “1.5 balls”, while in the case of “BK”, the number is relatively large as “15 balls”, that is, the small number related to “AK”. In many cases, no game balls are placed in the second big prize opening C20 in many cases, whereas in the small hits related to “BK”, in many cases the second big prize opening is used. One or more game balls enter C20.

  Next, FIG. 90 is an image diagram according to the transition of the number of game balls in the sixth embodiment. First, as shown in the section of FIG. 5A, in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state), the number of game balls fired and the left first main game start opening A10-1 The player's ball will gradually decrease due to the difference from the prize ball due to entering the ball.

  Next, as shown in the section (b) of the figure, during the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A”, a right-handed game is played, and a winning ball by entering the first big winning opening C10 is received. By paying out, the player's ball will increase. Thereafter, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5A” is completed, the game state becomes a probability-variable game state and a non-time-reduced game state (latent probability change state with a so-called non-electric support state). If the second main game symbol is in a variable display at the time of stop display of the big hit symbol “5A” (the so-called parallel lottery is adopted, such an event may occur). Even if the second main game symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol or a big hit symbol, the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped with a lost symbol.

  Next, as shown in the section (c) in the figure, in the winning lottery on the second main game side in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the latent probability varying state with the so-called non-electric support state) 1016/1024 (= almost every variation) with a probability of winning a small hit, and in the latent probability variation state, the symbol variation related to the small hit is short (1 second in this example), As a result of paying out a winning ball by entering the second big winning opening C20 related to the small hit, the player's holding ball increases. Note that the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (latency probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state) in (c) are STs (probability variation game state with a limited number of times) up to 200 variations. In addition, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (latency probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state) in (c) continue to average 146 variations since the probability of a big hit is 7/1024 per variation. In addition, because of the 146 symbol variations, the small hits are won on average 145 times. Therefore, during the stay in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state of (c), The average number of prize balls is 2175.

  Next, as shown in the section (d) of the figure, during a special game related to the big hit symbol “7B”, a prize ball is paid out by entering the second big prize opening C20, etc. The player's ball will increase. Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “7B” is finished, the game state becomes a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state (probability change state with a so-called electric support state). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, “7B” is a jackpot symbol with which the most game balls can be paid out, and “2400 balls” prize balls are paid out in the jackpot related to “7B”. Become.

  Here, the section from (c) to (d) described above includes the jackpot related to the “7B” symbol in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (the latent probability variation state with the so-called non-electric support state). A series of flows in which a game ball can be acquired. Of the series of flows, a section (c), that is, a section in which a winning ball is obtained by a small hit (or a section in which a winning ball excluding a big hit is acquired). The total average number of winning balls in (2) is “2145”. On the other hand, the section (d), that is, the big hit (the first main game side big hit and the second main game side) that has the largest number of winning balls. The total average number of winning balls in the section where the winning ball is won is “2400”, and the total number of winning balls by jacking> The total number of winning balls by small hits is configured. In addition, “total number of winning balls by jackpot> total number of winning balls excluding jackpot” is also configured.

  Next, as shown in the section (e) of the figure, in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (probability variation state with the so-called electric support state), the player plays a right-handed game, The game ball is fired toward the 1 main game start opening A10-2, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed. In addition, the game can proceed while maintaining the holding ball by the winning ball by entering the game ball into the right first main game start opening A10-2.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, in the case of the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (the latent probability varying state with the so-called non-electric support state) The variation time relating to the two main game symbols is set to a relatively short time (1 second in this example), and the game is advanced by firing a game ball toward the second main game start opening B10 by right-handed. On the other hand, in the case of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (probability variation state with the so-called electric support state), the variation time related to the second main game symbol is relatively long (in this example, 100). For a long time equal to or longer than minutes), and a right-handed game ball is fired toward the right first main game start port A10-2 to advance the game. Also, in the case of a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state (a latent probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state), winning continuously for the small hits related to entering the second main game starting port B10. In the case of a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state (probability variation state with a so-called electric support state), while the game ball is increased, the first main game starting point is obtained. The game is expected to win big wins while maintaining the ball with the winning ball of the electric accessory A11-2d, etc. Even when the game proceeds with a right hit, a plurality of games that differ depending on the game state are realized. Will be able to.

(Modification 1 from the sixth embodiment)
In addition, in 6th Embodiment, although the structure which can increase a holding ball by winning continuously in small hits was explained in full detail, such a game machine is only the structure of 6th Embodiment. It is not limited to. Therefore, a configuration in which the holding ball is increased by consecutive small hits different from the sixth embodiment is a first modification from the sixth embodiment, and only the changes from the sixth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  The configuration of the gaming machine according to the first modification from the sixth embodiment can execute the parallel lottery as exemplified in the sixth embodiment, and does not have the V winning opening C27 and the specific area C22. It is said.

  First, FIG. 91 is a drawing showing the basic structure of the front side of a gaming machine in Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, two start ports, a first main game start port A10 and a first main game start port A10-2, are provided as the first main game start port. The game starting port A10 is configured such that a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is easy to enter, and a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 is easy to enter. Further, the first main game start port A10-2, the second main game start port B10, and the auxiliary game start port H10 are provided on the right side of the game area D30, and a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 enters the ball. The game ball that flows down the left side of the game area D30 is configured to be difficult to enter. The second main game start port B10 is not provided with an electric accessory, and the first main game start port A10-2 can easily enter the first main game start port A10-2. The first main game starting port A11d that is displaceable between the open state and the closed state where entering the ball is difficult (displaceable based on the result of the auxiliary game), and the first main game starting port A10-2 It has a first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s-2 for detecting entrance. In addition, the first grand prize opening C10 and the first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d are easy to guide the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area), and flow down the left side of the game area D30. The game ball is configured to be difficult to be guided.

  Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to Step 1700 (sixth) in FIG. 70 in Modification 1 from the sixth embodiment. The change from the sixth embodiment is step 3800 (sixth variation 1), that is, after the small hit execution flag is turned off in step 1747-7, the main control is performed in step 3800 (sixth variation 1). CPUMC of the board | substrate M performs the short hit related short time end determination process mentioned later, and transfers to the following process (step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the small hit related short time end determination process in the first modification from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state and a time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3802, in step 3804, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped small winning symbol is the first main gaming small winning symbol (AK in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3804, in step 3806, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag. Next, in step 3808, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997). In addition, also when it is No in step 3802 or step 3804, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1997). As described above, in the first modification from the sixth embodiment, the time-saving gaming state ends when the first main game side is won in the case of the probability varying gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. That is, it is configured to shift to a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly to the sixth embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the variation efficiency of the second main game symbol becomes extremely high (the variation time becomes short), so that the second main game The number of balls will increase as the game side wins frequently. The main game flow is as follows: (1) A left-handed game is executed in a non-stochastic game state and a non-time-reduced game state, and the game progresses by entering the first main game start opening A10. 2) By winning the big hit on the first main game side, the game shifts to the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot is ended. (3) The right-handed is executed in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state. , The game proceeds by entering the first main game start opening A10-2 (the ball also enters the second main game start opening B10, but because the fluctuation efficiency is extremely bad, (4) The winning ball will not be increased.) (4) By winning the first main game small win, the game will shift from the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state to the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, The first main game start opening electric Since the object A11d is difficult to open, the ball does not enter the first main game start opening A10-2, and the variation efficiency of the second main game symbol is extremely improved, so that the second main game small hit symbol is frequently won. Will be.

  By configuring as described above, in the first modification from the sixth embodiment, the time-saving gaming state is completed by winning the first main game small hit symbol (from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state) The game state that is advantageous to the two players of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state can be continuously played. It can be a highly entertaining gaming machine that can be expected to win more.

  In addition, as a configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the sixth embodiment, (1) the display of the decorative symbol related to the second main gaming symbol is not executed (in the case of the non-stochastic variable gaming state) (To prevent the player from making a right-hand hit), (2) The opening time of the big winning opening at the big hit and the small hit on the second main game side is made relatively short (non-stochastic game state) (In order to prevent the game ball from entering the big winning opening even if the player starts to make a right-hand hit after detecting the big win or small win on the second main game side), (3) For example, a mechanism for slowing down the flow rate when the game ball flows down, such as around the rectifying passage D50 of the sixth embodiment, may be provided.

(Modification 2 from the sixth embodiment)
In the first modification from the sixth embodiment, the small hit game related to the first main game small hit symbol is executed, so that the time-saving gaming state can be shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state. The configuration in which the time saving gaming state can be ended by a small hit is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration in which the time saving gaming state can be ended by a small hit and a configuration different from the first modification from the sixth embodiment is a second modification from the sixth embodiment. Only changes from the first modification will be described in detail.

  The configuration of the gaming machine according to the second modification from the sixth embodiment can execute the parallel lottery as exemplified in the sixth embodiment, and the V prize opening C27 as exemplified in the third embodiment. It is set as the structure which has.

  First, FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the small hit related short time end determination process in the second modification from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3810, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3810, in step 3812, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is no ball entering the V winning opening C27 during the small hit. In the case of Yes in step 3812, in step 3814, the CPUMC of the main control board M measures the number of small hits that are continuously won in the time-saving gaming state. 1) is added to the counter) value. Next, in step 3816, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the time-short medium / small consecutive hit counter is a time-short end value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3816, in step 3818, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag. In the second modified example from the sixth embodiment, even if the small hits that have not entered the V winning opening C27 in the time-saving gaming state continue for a predetermined number of times, the short time medium / small / medium continuous counter value increases. Therefore, it will shift to the non-time-reduced gaming state. Next, in step 3820, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to step 3824. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 3824 also in the case of No in step 3810 and step 3812. Next, in step 3824, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the time-short / medium / small continuous counter to zero, and proceeds to the next processing (step 1997). In the case of No in step 3816, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997).

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 2 from the sixth embodiment, the small hit symbol that shifts to the time-reduced gaming state after the special game triggered by the small hit symbol and the non-time reduction In addition to providing a small hit symbol that shifts to the gaming state, in a time-saving gaming state, a non-time-saving gaming state is achieved by repeating a predetermined number of small hits that have not entered the V winning opening C27. When the small winning symbol that will shift to the non-time-reduced gaming state stops after the end of the special game to be transferred by entering the V winning opening C27 by being configured to be able to shift, the V winning opening While the game ball is not entered into C27, the design value is exceeded by allowing the game ball to enter the V winning opening C27 when the small winning symbol that shifts to the time-saving game state stops after the special game ends. Although it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball is acquired, the player is firing a game ball toward the second grand prize opening during a special game that is easy to win the V prize opening C27. Even if a situation where it is not possible to win the V winning opening C27 occurs, if the player enters the V winning opening C27 at the next small hit game, the user-friendly gaming machine which does not need to shift to the non-time-reduced gaming state. It can be.

(Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment)
In the modified example 2 from the sixth embodiment to the sixth embodiment, the gaming property in the gaming machine having the small hit is exemplified, but the configuration of the gaming machine having the small hit is not limited thereto. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine having a small hit different from the configuration described above is referred to as a third modification from the sixth embodiment, and only the changes from the sixth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 95 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M in Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. Here, the changes from the sixth embodiment are step 1700 (sixth modification 3) and step 3150 (sixth modification 3). That is, after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 1700 (sixth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the small hit game control process described later, and proceeds to step 1950 (third). To do. Further, after the prize ball payout control process is executed in step 1997, in step 3150 (sixth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an external signal output process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1999.

  Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 80 in Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. . First, in step 1403-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the change start condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1403-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads the main game side random number in step 1403-2. Next, in step 1403-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the read main game side random number from the hold information and shifts the remaining hold information (holding digestion in this example). Next, in step 1403-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game symbol is determined based on the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number) and the game state. Run a lottery. Next, in step 1403-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). A stop symbol related to the main game symbol is determined. Next, in Step 1403-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol determination lottery result, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number) and the main game board determination random number. A variation mode of the first (second) main game symbol is determined based on the stop symbol related to the game symbol. Next, in step 3650 (sixth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a variable fixed time determination process described later. Next, in step 1403-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area and the current game. A command related to the state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Do). Next, in step 1403-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the main game symbol variation time in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1403-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the display unit B21g), according to the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1403-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1403-12. In the case of No in step 1403-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on in step 1403-13. In the case of Yes at step 1403-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M proceeds to step 1403-12.

  Next, in step 1403-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1403-12, in step 1403-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits information indicating that the symbol variation is completed (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1403-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbol on the display unit B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1403-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag. Next, in step 1403-17, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the determined variable fixed time to the variable fixed time timer and starts. Next, in step 1403-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the variable fixing flag, and proceeds to step 1403-20. In the case of No in step 1403-13, in step 1403-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variable fixing flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 1403-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M proceeds to step 1403-20.

  Next, in step 1403-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variable fixed time timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1403-20, in step 1403-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the variable fixing flag. Next, in step 1403-22, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1403-22, in step 1403-23, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a big hit symbol stop command (command to the sub-control board S side). Next, in step 1403-24, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403-22, in step 1403-25, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1403-25, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag in step 1403-26, and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). In the case of No in 1403-25, the process proceeds to step 1500 (fourth).

  Next, in step 1500 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process, and proceeds to the next process (step 1550). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1403-12 and step 1403-20, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). In addition, also when it is No at step 1403-19, it transfers to the following process (process of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 3650 (sixth modification 3) in FIG. 96 in Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game short time flag is on. Next, in the case of Yes in step 3652, in step 3654, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the change is a symbol change related to the second main game. In the case of Yes in step 3654, in step 3656, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the change is a symbol change related to a small hit. In the case of Yes in step 3656, in step 3658, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the fixed fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation as a long time (for example, 30 seconds), and performs the next processing (processing in step 1403-8). Migrate to If NO in step 3652, step 3654 or step 3656, in step 3660, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the fluctuation fixing time of the fluctuation to be a short time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the next The process proceeds to the process (the process of step 1403-8). Thus, in the third modification from the sixth embodiment, the variable fixed time related to the small hit symbol on the second main game side in the time-reduced gaming state is the other variable fixed time (for example, the main variable that is not the small hit symbol). Time value that is different from the fixed time variation of the game symbol, the small fixed symbol variation time of the second main game side when not in the time-reduced gaming state, the small fixed symbol variation fixed time of the first main game side, etc. It has become. In addition, by configuring in this way, in the time-reduced game state, when the second main game side win is won, the second main game hold is generated before the small hit related to the small hit symbol is started. It is configured so that the time to be secured can be secured.

  Next, FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process in Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. First, in Step 1703-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit end demonstrating flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 1703-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the discharge waiting flag is off in Step 1703-2. In the case of Yes in step 1703-2, in step 1703-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 1703-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag in Step 1703-4. Next, in step 1703-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the opening pattern of the special winning opening relating to the round. Next, in step 1703-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1703-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening and starts the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1703-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts a discharge waiting timer MP41t-2 (in this example, an increment timer), and proceeds to step 1703-11. On the other hand, if No in Step 1703-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on in Step 1703-10. If Yes in step 1703-10, the process proceeds to step 1703-11. Next, in Step 1703-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there has been a prize at the second big prize opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 1703-11, in step 1703-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined number (10 in this example) has been won in the second big prize opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 1703-12, the process proceeds to step 1703-14. On the other hand, if step 1703-11 or step 1703-12 is No, in step 1703-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit gaming timer value has reached a predetermined time. In the case of Yes in step 1703-13, the process proceeds to step 1703-14.

  Next, in Step 1703-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1703-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge waiting flag, and proceeds to step 1703-16. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1703-2, the process proceeds to Step 1703-16.

  Next, in step 1703-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the discharge standby timer value is the discharge standby time end value (13 seconds in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1703-16, in step 1703-17, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the discharge waiting timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, in step 1703-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge waiting flag. Next, in step 1703-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1703-19, in step 1703-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds a small hit end demo timer to the small hit end demo time A (which is shorter than the small hit end demo time B described later, In this example, 3 seconds) is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1703-22. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1703-19, in step 1703-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds a small hit end demo time to the small hit end demo timer B (longer than the aforementioned small hit end demo time A). Yes, in this example, 5 seconds) is set and the process proceeds to Step 1703-22.

  Next, in step 1703-22, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit end demonstrating flag, and proceeds to step 1703-23. In addition, also when it is No in step 1703-1, it transfers to step 1703-23. Next, in step 1703-23, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit end demo timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1703-23, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit end demonstrating flag in step 1703-24. Next, in step 1703-25, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets (zero clears) the small hit gaming timer MP41t. Next, in step 1703-26, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 1997). It should be noted that the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997) also in the case of No in step 1703-10, step 1703-13, step 1703-16, or step 1703-23.

  Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3150 (sixth variation 3) in FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3154, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and sends it to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1999).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output through the external relay terminal plate G according to the modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the same figure (image diagram of signal output). The external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal portions to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information relating to award ball payout, information relating to winning or symbol stop, current gaming state (normal gaming state, Error information for outputting various error information detected by the opening detection sensor when the door is opened, the terminal for gaming state information output for outputting information on specific gaming state, special gaming state, etc.) Output terminals and the like} are provided. As will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are configured to be capable of outputting information from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC by being connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout related information, which is information output from the winning ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal that outputs a signal during a big hit at the time of a big hit (a plurality of jacks depending on the type of the big hit) ), A door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a start opening winning output terminal that outputs a signal when winning at the starting opening, and a shortage of balls in the prize ball tank KT Game-related information, which is important information for game hall operators, such as a terminal for outputting a signal when the ball is out and a terminal for outputting a special symbol when outputting a signal when the special symbol is stopped. This is an output terminal. That is, the output terminal for the payout related information is set as one output terminal, so that it is possible to avoid the exhaustion of the output terminals for these important game related information.

  In the third modification from the sixth embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH send game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. It is configured to send. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

  Here, the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the sixth embodiment will be described. First, between the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G The external relay terminal board G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is constituted by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. I don't mean. That is, an electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is ON / OFF) by the unit, the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. When the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, whereby the output terminal and the hall computer HC are brought into conduction. In addition, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, and the output terminal and the hall computer HC are not conducted. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G can be obtained by detecting the conduction period. With this configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and This is to prevent a goto action (so-called remote operation goto) that illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing the go-to action, but is not limited to this, for example, a pair of light emitting units and A photo sensor having a light receiving unit is also configured to enable one-way communication (for example, light from a light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by a hall computer HC). It is supplemented that the signal can be received by reading by the unit.

  However, since the structure is once replaced with a physical signal (switch state is ON / OFF), the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC with one of the external relay terminal boards G. It is difficult to transmit complex information using an input / output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, an output terminal for a special symbol determination number of times, It is customary to configure such that “only information indicating that one variation of a special symbol has ended” can be transmitted).

  Next, with reference to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 in FIG. 100, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First, it is a signal of the symbol variation meter; a signal for outputting the number of symbol variations relating to the first main game and the second main game; from the first main game symbol temporary stop timing and the second main game symbol temporary stop timing; This signal continues to output an ON signal until the end of the fixed time. Note that in the third modification from the sixth embodiment, when the small winning symbol on the second main game side is won in the time-saving gaming state, that is, when the second main gaming small bonus symbol is stopped, the fluctuation occurs. Since the fixed time is longer than in other cases, the output time of the signal related to the symbol variation is also relatively long.

  Next, it is a big hit system signal; a signal that outputs that the big hit is being made (for example, that the condition device operation flag is ON) is based on the ball entering the V winning opening C26 triggered by the small hit In the case of a big hit, the timing at which a ball entering the V winning opening C26 is detected, and in the case of a big hit triggered by the stoppage of the big hit symbol, the condition device operation flag is turned off → on (the timing for starting the big hit); It is turned off after the ON signal is output until it is finished (from condition device operation flag ON to OFF). Note that for the small hits won in the time-reduced gaming state and the small hits won in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the small hit end demo time is shorter for the small hits won in the time-reducing gaming state. Therefore, the time for outputting the external terminal signal in the small hit end demonstration time is shorter for the small hits won in the time-reduced gaming state than in the non-reduced gaming state. . In addition, the same configuration can be applied in the small hit start demo time, that is, in the small hit winning in the time shortening gaming state and the small hit winning in the non-time shortening gaming state, The small hit start demo time is shorter for the winning small hit, and the time to output the external terminal signal related to the small hit start demo time in the small hit start demo time is in the non-time-reduced gaming state. It may be configured such that the small win won in the time-saving gaming state is shorter in time than the winning small win. In addition, the same configuration can be applied to the external terminal signal indicating that the jackpot is in effect, that is, in the jackpot won in the time-saving gaming state and the jackpot won in the non-time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming The jackpot won in the state may be configured so that the output time of the external terminal signal indicating that the jackpot won in the non-time-saving gaming state is being hit is shorter. If you win a big hit in the time-saving gaming state, you are in a non-time-saving gaming state while the jackpot is running, and if you win a small hit in the time-saving gaming state, Time-saving gaming state (the time-saving gaming state is maintained). In addition, an external terminal signal related to information indicating that the game is in a time-saving game state may be output, and the external terminal signal can be output in the time-saving game state. It is configured such that it can continue to output an ON signal over “medium / small hits → time-saving gaming state”. As described above, the time shortening gaming state may indicate that the opening time extension function is activated, and the non-time shortening gaming state indicates that the opening time extension function is not activated. Also good.

  Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing in Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. The changes from the sixth embodiment are step 2204-1 (sixth modification 3), step 2204-2 (sixth modification 3), and step 2204-3 (sixth modification 3), that is, in step 2204. After turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2204-1 (sixth variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (non-time shortened gaming state). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2204-1 (sixth variation 3), in step 2204-2 (sixth variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the second main game side. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2204-2 (sixth variation 3), in step 2204-3 (sixth variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S hides the stop display and variation display of the decorative symbols. The process proceeds to step 2208. In the case of No in step 2204-1 (sixth modification 3) or step 2204-2 (sixth modification 3), the process proceeds to step 2206. As described above, in the third modification from the sixth embodiment, in the symbol variation on the second main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is not displayed, so that the non-time-reduced gaming state is achieved. Thus, it can be configured so that the player does not execute right-handed. Such a configuration can also be applied to other embodiments, and is suitable in the case where it is not desired to execute right-handed in a non-time-reduced gaming state or a non-probability variation gaming state.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment, whether or not the game state, the winning / failing result relating to the main gaming symbol, the symbol variation on the first main gaming side, or the second main It is configured so that the variation fixed time can be different depending on whether it is a symbol variation on the game side, etc., and an external terminal signal related to the variation fixed time can be output to appropriately output a signal outside the gaming machine Will be able to.

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board applicable to this example will be described with reference to the external terminal transmission content determination table 2 in FIG. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First, the external output signal of signal number 3 can be applied to a gaming machine that can enter a probability-variable gaming state after the end of a special game by entering a specific area C22 in the special winning opening. The second big winning opening (attacker) C20 having a specific area C22 that is a pitching area for determining whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state is short-opened (for example, maximum open time) Is a distribution game execution round, which is a round (which is 0.01 seconds), and is in a state in which the detection of entering the specific area C22 is valid, and the special electric accessory is being operated. Sometimes, the signal that outputs that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 is being executed; the second big winning opening C20 is being opened for a short time, and the detection of entering the specific area C22 is effective From the timing when the game ball enters the specific area C22 when it is in the state, the signal continues to output the ON signal for 1 second. Note that when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the distributed game execution round in which the second grand prize opening C20 is long open, the external terminal signal is not output. That is, the configuration is such that the presence / absence of the output of the external terminal signal when entering the specific area C22 differs between the long open big hit and the short open big hit. In addition, it is preferable that the external terminal signal is not output when a special game is executed once except for the first one satisfying the output timing.

  Next, the external output signal of signal number 3 can be applied to a gaming machine in which a big hit can be started after the small hit game ends by entering the V winning opening C27 in the big winning opening. An additional external terminal signal; a signal that outputs that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27 during a small hit game in the non-time-reduced gaming state; From the timing when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 within the V winning opening effective period; from 0.200 seconds on to 0.200 seconds off.

Next, FIG. 103 is an example of a configuration of an electric-powered object opening time applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. In the same figure, the case where the big hit symbol stops or the small hit symbol stops and the big hit or small hit starts while the auxiliary game symbol changes, and then the auxiliary game symbol stops during the big hit or small hit execution. Illustrated.
(1) <When jackpot symbol stops in non-time-saving gaming state>
If the jackpot symbol is stopped in the non-time reduction game state while the auxiliary game symbol is changing, the non-time reduction game state is maintained even if the jackpot symbol is stopped, and the bonus game symbol is changing during the jackpot execution. When the auxiliary game symbol is hit and stops at the symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory is relatively short open (0.2 second open → closed).
(2) <When the jackpot symbol stops in the time-saving gaming state>
If the jackpot symbol stops in the time-saving game state while the auxiliary game symbol is changing, the jackpot symbol is stopped and the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state and is changing during the jackpot execution. When the auxiliary game symbol is stopped at the winning symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory is relatively short (0.2 seconds open → closed).
(3) <When the small hit symbol stops in the non-time-saving gaming state>
If the small hit symbol is stopped in the non-time-reduced gaming state while the auxiliary game symbol is changing, the non-time-reduced gaming state is maintained even if the small hit symbol is stopped. When the auxiliary game symbol that is in the middle is stopped at the winning symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory is relatively short open (0.2 second open → closed).
(4) <When a small hit symbol stops in the time-saving gaming state>
If the small hit symbol is stopped in the time reduction game state while the auxiliary game symbol is changing, the time reduction game state is maintained even if the small hit symbol is stopped. When the auxiliary game symbol is stopped at the winning symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory is relatively long open (0.2 second open → 0.8 closed → 4 second → closed).

Next, FIG. 104 is a configuration example in the case where a small win is won in the final variation of the time-saving gaming state according to the present example. For example, when the game shifts to the time-reduced gaming state 100 times after the end of the big hit, the 100th rotation after the end of the big hit is the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state.
<Configuration 1>
In a situation where the main game short flag is on, the small hit symbol may be stopped, and the main game short flag may be turned off at the stop timing of the small hit symbol.
<Configuration 2>
In the situation where the main game short flag is on, the small hit symbol stops, and at the stop timing of the small hit symbol, the main game short flag remains on, and the small hit symbol for the small hit symbol starts, You may comprise so that a main game short time flag may turn off at the timing which a small hit game is complete | finished.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to this example, if the main game probability change flag is turned on and a win is won, the main game probability change flag remains on during the small hit execution, and the main game When the big hit is won in the state where the probability change flag is on, the main game probability change flag is turned off during the big hit.

  Further, in the examples of the gaming machine according to the present example other than the first modified example from the sixth embodiment and the second modified example from the sixth embodiment, the winning prize is won with the main game short flag being on. In such a case, the main game short time flag remains on during execution of the big hit, and if the big win is won with the main game short time flag turned on, the main game short time is reduced during the big hit execution. The flag is configured to be turned off.

  Next, FIG. 105 is an example of a notice effect according to this example. As shown in the figure, in this example, there are a plurality of types of notice effects that can be executed, and the notice effect that the big hit is deterministic (or likely to be a big hit), and the small hit is definite ( Or, there is a notice effect that is likely to be a small hit). In addition, there is no notice effect that denies the big hit, while there are a plurality of notice effects that deny the small hit, such as “Serif notice (rainbow)”. That is, there are more notice effects that deny a small hit than notice effects that deny a big hit.

Moreover, you may comprise as follows as a structure of the gaming machine concerning this example.
(1) By entering the specific area C22 during the special game, the game shifts to the probability variation game state after the special game ends.
(2) Of the second main game special games, the ratio of the big hits (second main game long open big hits) in which the big prize opening becomes long in the distributed game execution round is the distribution in the first main game special games It is higher than the percentage of big hits (first main game long open big hit) that the big prize opening becomes long open in the game execution round.
(3) In the non-stochastic game state and the non-time shortening game state, when a long open big hit is won and a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the long open big hit, the time reduced game after the long open big hit ends Transition to a state (or easy transition).
(4) When the long open big hit is won in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening game state, and a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the long open big hit, the non-time shortened gaming state after the end of the long open big hit (Or easy to migrate).
(4) In the case of winning the small hit on the first main game side in the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the game shifts to the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state after the end of the small winning.

(Seventh embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the special ball is entered into the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, so that the transition to the probability variation game state is made after the special game is finished. It is not limited only to the second embodiment. Therefore, when the game ball enters the specific area C22, the seventh embodiment has a configuration that shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game and is different from the second embodiment. Hereinafter, only differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a basic structure of the front side of a gaming machine in the seventh embodiment. As a feature point in the seventh embodiment, as in the second embodiment, a specific area C22 is provided in the second grand prize opening C20, and a game ball is placed in the specific area C22 during execution of the special game. By entering the ball, it is configured to shift to a probability variation gaming state after the special game is finished (so-called tamabuki machine). Further, the shape of the second main game start port B10 is a closed state where a game ball cannot enter the second main game start port B10 {a ball receiving member formed in a flat plate shape (hereinafter referred to as a ball receiving member). Is retracted from the game area D30} and an open state where the game ball can enter (a state where the ball receiving member protrudes into the game area D30). Here, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d in the seventh embodiment employs an electric accessory (so-called “velo power”) in which the ball receiving portion slides back and forth, and is in an open state. A game ball is received by a ball receiving member protruding into the game area D30, and the game ball is guided to a second main game start-in entrance detection device B11s (arranged inside the game board). Further, in the seventh embodiment, as the electric combination, an electric combination in which the ball receiving member slides back and forth is adopted so that it is difficult to receive the game ball in the opening operation in a short time. Is not limited, even if a so-called tulip-type electric accessory that can take a closed state where the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter and an open state where the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state is adopted. Good.

  Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 38 in the seventh embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1611 (seventh), step 1850 (second), step 1620-2 (seventh), step 1620-4 (seventh), and step 1620-6 (seventh). , Step 1620-8 (seventh) and step 1620-10 (seventh), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game start display instruction command to the sub-control board S side in step 1608 Alternatively, if it is determined in step 1610 that the CPUMC of the main control board M has the special game execution flag turned on, in step 1611 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the second grand prize. It is determined whether or not the round is related to the opening of the mouth C20 (first to 13R, 15th R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (seventh), in step 1850 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (seventh), the process proceeds to step 1612. In the seventh embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the special game is 16R regardless of the jackpot symbol, and the winning prizes (first winning prize opening C10, second winning prize opening C20) By changing the opening mode, the number of game balls that can be acquired in the special game is made different.

  In step 1618, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag, in step 1620-2 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the jackpot symbol related to the special game is high. Profits jackpot symbol {the shielding member C28 is released one or more times in the distributed game execution round (the game ball may enter the specific area C22 when the game ball is continuously fired toward the second big prize opening C20) In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B, 5B, 7B, and 7A}. If YES in step 1620-2 (seventh), in step 1620-4 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the long open pattern (execution of special game) as the open pattern of the first big prize opening C10. When the game ball is continuously fired toward the first grand prize opening C10, the opening pattern is such that it is definite or easy to enter the first big prize opening C10. ) Is set. Next, in step 1620-6 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first big prize opening C10, starts the release timer MP54t, and proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1620-2 (seventh), in step 1620-8 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the short opening pattern (special game) as the opening pattern of the first big prize opening C10. When the game ball continues to be fired toward the first grand prize opening C10 during the execution of the game, it is definite or difficult to enter the first big prize opening C10. Open pattern). Next, in step 1620-10 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first big prize opening C10 based on the set opening pattern, starts the opening timer MP54t, and proceeds to step 1622. Transition. The first grand prize opening C10 is opened at the 14th and 16th Rs in the special game (the second big prize opening C20 is opened at the 1st to 13th and 15th Rs in the special game). Note that, as in the seventh embodiment, in the case where the first prize winning opening C10 and the second prize winning opening C20 are configured to have two big winning prize openings, the first big winning prize opening C10. And the second grand prize opening C20 (the predetermined number in step 1624, the number of game balls entering the big prize opening where the round will end) and / or the number of prize balls (in the big prize opening) The number of game balls given to a player when one game ball enters may be made different. Further, when the second prize winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is the second prize winning opening C20, the shape of the second prize winning opening C20 may be smaller than that of the first prize winning opening C10. The second grand prize opening C20 may have a larger number of counts than the first big prize opening C10, and the second big prize opening C20 may have fewer balls than the first big prize opening C10. May be.

  Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) in FIG. 34 in the seventh embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1856 (seventh), step 1864 (seventh), and step 1900 (seventh). That is, the CPUMC of the main control board M has the distribution game execution flag off. If it is determined in step 1856 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the opening pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. It should be noted that in the distribution game execution round, the second grand prize opening C20 is configured to be always opened long, and whether or not the game ball can easily enter the specific area C22 depending on whether or not the shielding member C28 is opened long. It is configured to determine whether or not. Next, in steps 1860 and 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the number-of-entries counter to zero and turns on the distribution game execution flag, and then in step 1864 (seventh), the main control board M CPUMC opens the second big prize opening C20 with the opening pattern set in step 1856 (seventh), starts the opening timer MP54t, and proceeds to step 1900 (seventh). If the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the distribution game execution flag is on, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a shielding member drive control process, which will be described later, in step 1900 (seventh). Then, the process proceeds to step 1866. In addition, in 7th Embodiment, although it comprised so that it might have two big prize openings, the 1st big prize opening C10 and the 2nd big prize opening C20, it is not limited to this, In one big prize opening The configuration of the seventh embodiment may be applied. That is, when one big winning opening is the first big winning opening C10, both the distribution game execution round which is a round in which the shielding member C28 can be opened and the normal round in which the shielding member is not opened are the first. You may comprise so that it may perform in the big prize opening C10.

  Next, FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the shielding member drive control process according to the subroutine of Step 1900 (seventh) in FIG. 108 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 1901, the CPUMC of the main control board M is currently executing a round of distribution game execution (a round in which the shielding member C <b> 28 can be opened. In this example, the fourth R, sixth R, eighth R ). In the case of Yes in step 1901, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1902 whether or not the entry of the first game ball in the special game being executed has been detected. In the case of Yes in Step 1902, in Step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M enters the specific area C22 if the game ball is continuously released toward the second big prize opening C20 during execution of the special game. The driving of the shielding member C28 is started at a short opening time when it is difficult for a game ball to enter, and the process proceeds to Step 1906. On the other hand, if the answer is No in Step 1902, the process proceeds to Step 1906.

  Next, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is the second main game big hit symbol (3B, 5B, and 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the currently executed round is the 6th R. In the case of Yes in step 1908, in step 1910, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second game ball has been entered in the round being executed (in this example, the sixth R). . In the case of Yes in step 1910, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens to the specific area C22 when the game ball is continuously released toward the second big prize opening C20 during execution of the special game. The driving of the shielding member C28 is started at a time when it is definite that the game ball enters or the opening time that makes it easy to enter is long open), and the process proceeds to step 1914. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1906, Step 1908, or Step 1910, the process proceeds to Step 1914.

  Next, in step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stopped big hit symbol is the first main game shielding member length open big hit symbol (one of the first main game side big hits, which is a distributed game execution round). In this example, it is determined whether the shielding member C28 is a big hit symbol that can be long open, and in this example, it is 5A · 7A). In the case of Yes in step 1914, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the currently executed round is the 8th R. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the sixth game ball has been entered in the round being executed (in this example, the 8th R). . In the case of Yes in step 1918, in step 1920, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts driving the shielding member C28 with the long open, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1866). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1901, step 1914, step 1916 or step 1918, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1866). The opening time of the shielding member C28 is 50 ms in the case of short opening, and 29000 ms in the case of long opening. It should be noted that when the opening period of the second big prize opening C20 ends during the driving (opening) of the shielding member C28, the driving of the shielding member C28 is forcibly ended (closed).

  Here, the right part of the figure is a list of count numbers that the shielding member C28 opens in the sorting game execution round. First, in the case of the first main game shielding member short open big hit symbol (2A), the shielding member C28 is opened only in the first count in any of the fourth R, sixth R, and eighth R. Incidentally, the first count means the first ball entering in the round being executed. Further, when the shielding member C28 is opened at the first count, the shielding member C28 is opened short, and when the shielding member C28 is opened at the second or sixth count, the shielding member C28 is opened long. Yes. Next, in the case of the first main game shielding member length open big hit symbol (5A, 7A), the fourth R and the sixth R are only the first count, and the eighth R is the first count and the sixth count. . That is, if the game ball continues to be fired toward the second grand prize opening C20 during the execution of the special game related to the first main game shielding member long open big hit symbol (5A, 7A), the 6th ball of the 8R The game ball that has entered the eye enters the specific area C22. Next, in the case of the second main game big hit symbol (3B, 5B, 7B), the fourth R and the eighth R are only the first count, and the sixth R is the first count and the second count. That is, if the game ball is continuously launched toward the second grand prize opening C20 during the execution of the special game related to the second main game big hit symbol (3B / 5B / 7B), the second ball of the 6R The game ball that has entered the ball enters the specific area C22. In addition, in allotment game execution rounds, regardless of the special game related to any jackpot symbol, in all the distribution game execution rounds (4R, 6R and 8R), the first count of game balls entered Thus, the shielding member C28 is configured to be opened (in this example, it is opened with a short opening). Note that the configuration of the round and count in which the shielding member C28 for each jackpot symbol is long open is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot symbol is divided into three groups only by the jackpot symbol on the first main game side. Specifically, when the big hit related to “7A” is executed, the shielding member C28 is opened long by the entrance of the second count game ball in the sixth round, and when the big hit related to “5A” is executed, It may be configured that the shielding member C28 is opened for a long time by the entry of the 6th game ball in the 8th round, and the shielding member C28 is not opened for a big hit related to “2A”.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, as the distribution game execution round, it may be a combination of any one or a plurality of rounds of even-numbered rounds of the second R, fourth R, sixth R, eighth R, tenth R, and twelfth rounds, The distribution game execution round may be a combination of one or a plurality of odd rounds. Further, the shielding member C28 is not driven in rounds other than the distribution game execution round. Further, the round and count number in which the shielding member C28 is long open (or short open) are not limited to the configuration of this example. For example, (1) first main game shielding member long open big hit symbol (5A, 7A) Shield member C28 is long open at the second count of 4R in the big hit relating to (2) In the case of big hit related to 5A, the shield member C28 is long open at the second count of 4R and related to 7A In the case of a big hit, the shielding member C28 is opened for a long time at the 6th count of the 6R. (3) Shielding at the 6th count of the 8R at the big hit related to the second main game big hit symbol (3B, 5B, 7B) When the member C28 is long open, (4) In the case of a big hit relating to 3B, the shielding member C28 is long open in the second count of 4R, and in the case of a big hit relating to 5B, in the sixth count of the sixth R Shield member C28 is long open , When the jackpot according to 7B, the shielding member C28 two count th first 8R may be long open.

  The seventh embodiment may be configured as follows. (1) There are a plurality of types of the first main game shielding member short open big hit symbol, the first main game shielding member long open big hit symbol, and the second main game big hit symbol. (2) The first main game having a plurality of types Shield member length open big hit symbol is divided into A group and B group. During big hit related to A group, 6R is 1st count and 6th count and shielding member C28 is opened, and big hit related to B group Among them, the shield member C28 is opened when the 4th R is the 1st count and the 6th count. (3) The 1st main game shielding member is shielded at the 1st count and 6th count even during the big hit related to the short open big hit design. The member C28 may have a round to be opened, but in such a case, it is preferable that the opening of any shielding member C28 is a short opening. (4) First main game shielding member length Open jackpot symbol , Divided into A group, B group and C group, during the big hits related to the A group, the 6R is the first count and the sixth count, the shielding member C28 is opened, and during the big hits related to the B group, The shielding member C28 is opened when the fourth R is the first count and the sixth count, and the shielding member C28 is opened when the sixth R is the first count and the second count during the big hit relating to the C group. (5) First The big hit on the main game side and the big hit on the second main game side, with the 6R being the first count and the sixth count, the big hit that the shielding member C28 is opened (the same round and the same count, the shielding member C28 is the same) In such a case, the shielding member C28 is opened at the same round and the same count for all the big wins on the first main game side. The ratio at which the first main game side jackpot is selected is the second main game side jackpot in which the shielding member C28 is released in the same round and the same count for all the second main game side jackpots. It is preferable to configure so that is lower than the selected ratio. Specifically, in the case of a big hit relating to 7A, the shielding member C28 is opened at the first and second counts of 6R, which is the same as the big hit relating to the second main game big hit symbol, and the big hit relating to 5A In this case, the shielding member C28 is opened at the first count and the sixth count of the 8R. In addition, during the big hit related to 7A, an effect of notifying that it is easy to enter the game ball into the specific area C22 from the start of the big hit and a battle victory effect (the player is able to enter the specific area C22 easily. After hitting the player, an effect that informs that it is easy to enter the game ball into the specific area is executed, and during the big hit of 5B, a battle defeat effect (easy to enter the specific area C22) After telling the player about the sexuality, an effect that does not notify that it is easy to enter the game ball into the specific area is executed (the battle defeat effect is executed during the big hit of 5B, Actually, it is easy to enter a game ball into the specific area C22).

  By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to predict at which timing the shielding member C28 will be opened long, that is, at what timing the game ball has entered the specific area C22. As a result, during the special game, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the probability-changing gaming state, and the fun of the game is enhanced. In the seventh embodiment, the shielding member C28 is configured to be short-opened by entering the first count of game balls in all distribution game execution rounds in the jackpots related to all jackpot symbols. However, it is not necessary to apply the configuration of the short opening. Specifically, when the big hit according to the first main game shielding member short opening big hit symbol is executed, the fourth R, the sixth R and the eighth R are shielded. When the member C28 does not open and the big hit according to the first main game shielding member length open big hit symbol is executed, the shielding member C28 does not open in the fourth R and the sixth R, and the sixth counting game ball in the eighth R When the ball enters, the shielding member C28 is opened for a long time. When the big hit related to the second main game big hit symbol is executed, the shielding member C28 is not opened in the fourth R and the eighth R, and in the sixth R 2 The ball entrance und th game ball may be configured such that the shield member C28 is long opened. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the first count is the first hit regardless of the big hit relating to the first main game shielding member short open big hit symbol and the big hit relating to the first main game shielding member long open big hit symbol. The game may be configured to have one or more sorting game execution rounds in which the shielding member C28 is released by entering the game ball into the sixth prize winning opening. Constructed in this way, in both the big hits related to the first main game shielding member short open big hit symbol and the big hits related to the first main game shielding member long open big hit symbol, the first and sixth counts of the 6R In the case where the shielding member C28 is opened by entering the game ball into the big winning opening, in the big hit relating to the first main gaming shielding member short opening big hit design, the gaming ball enters the sixth winning big winning opening. While the shielding member C28 is short-opened by the ball, the shielding member C28 is long-opened by the game ball entering the sixth winning prize opening in the big hit according to the first main game shielding member length opening big hit symbol. You may comprise. In the case of such a configuration, the number of distribution game execution rounds in which the shielding member C28 is released when the game ball enters the 1st and 6th count big winning openings is as follows. The number of hits related to the main game shielding member short open big hit symbol and the number of big hits related to the first main game shielding member long open big hit symbol may be the same or different. In addition, the sorting game execution round in which the shielding member C28 is opened by the game ball entering the first and sixth count big winning openings is a big hit according to the first main game shielding member short open big hit symbol. Then, it is 4R, and it may be configured to be 6R in the big hit related to the first main game shielding member length open big hit design.

  Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 2400 of FIG. 17 in the seventh embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 2414-2 (seventh) to step 2414-8 (seventh), that is, in step 2414-2 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S is The big hit being executed is the second main game length release notification big hit symbol (the second main game side big hit that notifies that the shielding member C28 is long open at the start of the big hit. In this example, the second main game side big hit It is determined whether or not the jackpot is related to all jackpots, 3B, 5B, and 7B). In the case of Yes in step 2414-2 (seventh), in step 2414-3 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a continuous effect (probability variation game state after the jackpot is over) as an effect during the big hit being executed. A command for displaying on the effect display device SG is set, and the process proceeds to step 2414-8 (seventh). On the other hand, if step 2414-2 (seventh) is No (in the case of 2A, 5A, 7A), in step 2414-4 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the first main hit. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit according to the game length release notification big hit symbol (a big hit on the first main game side that notifies that the shielding member C28 becomes long open during the big hit, in this example, 7A). In the case of Yes in step 2414-4 (seventh), in step 2414-5 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs a battle victory effect (after executing the battle effect) as an effect during the big hit being executed. The command for displaying on the effect display device SG is set, and the process proceeds to step 2414-8 (seventh). On the other hand, if step 2414-4 (seventh) is No (in the case of 2A / 5A), in step 2414-6 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a battle as a big hit effect during execution. A command for displaying on the effect display device SG a defeat effect (an effect that does not notify that the shielding member C28 becomes long open after executing the battle effect) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2414-8 (seventh). Next, in step 2414-8 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of winning prizes, and proceeds to step 2426. In this way, as effects that can be executed during the big hit on the first main game side, an effect that informs that the shielding member C28 is long open (battle victory effect), and that the shielding member C28 is long open. When the battle victory effect is executed, the big hit that the shielding member C28 becomes long open during the big hit is being executed. When the battle defeat effect is executed, either the big hit where the shielding member C28 is long open during the big hit or the big hit where the shielding member C28 is not long open during the big hit is possible It also suggests that there is. A battle defeat effect is executed as an effect during the big hit, but the big hit with the long opening of the shielding member C28 during the big hit is a big hit related to “5A”. The effect executed during the big hit on the second main game side is the first hit (the big hit when the second main game big hit symbol stops in the non-stochastic game state and the non-time-reduced game state), or the non-probability In the big hit when the second main game big hit symbol stops in the variable game state and the time shortening game state, it is definite that the exclusive effect (the shielding member C28 is opened long), not the continuous effect. Or, an effect of notifying that it is easy to open long) may be executed. Further, it may be configured such that the battle effect is not always executed during the big hit on the second main game side, or the rate at which the battle effect is executed is lower than during the big hit on the first main game side. In addition, during the big hit on the first main game side in the consecutive game (the big hit when the big hit symbol stops in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, or the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state) The ratio of the execution of an effect other than the battle effect is less than the case where the battle effect is not performed or when the game is not in a retreat. {Before the big hit or at the start of the big hit, the shielding member C28 is long open during the big hit. It may be configured to increase the ratio of notifying that it becomes definite or easy to open long (always notify).

  Next, FIG. 111 is an operation diagram relating to a special game (particularly a distributed game) in the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. First, two action diagrams are shown at the top and bottom. In the upper stage, the case where the shielding member C28 is opened long is illustrated, and in the lower stage, the case where the shielding member C28 is opened short is illustrated.

  First, on the upper side, the number of rounds of the special game being executed, the opening period of the second big prize opening C20 in that round, 29000 ms, and 60 ms as the preparation period for the next round are shown.

  Next, the upper stage action diagram will be specifically described in time series from the left. First, the special game related to the big hit symbol “7A”, which is the first main game shielding member long open big hit symbol, is being executed, and the 7R of the special game is finished, and the second big prize winning opening C20 and the shielding member C28 are Under the closed state, the second grand prize opening C20 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the start of the 8R which is the sorting game execution round. Next, when the first ball entering the second big prize opening C20 in the 8R is detected at the timing 2 in the figure, the shielding member C28 is short-opened (opened for 50 ms, during execution of the special game) When the game ball is continuously fired toward the second big prize opening C20, the game ball enters the specific area C22 for an open time during which it is difficult to enter).

  Next, when the sixth ball entering the second big prize opening C20 in the 8R is detected at the timing of 3 in the figure, the shielding member C28 is long open (29000 ms open, during execution of the special game) When the game ball continues to be fired toward the second grand prize opening C20, it is determined that the game ball will enter the specific area C22 (or an opening time during which it is easy to enter). Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, 29000 ms has passed since the second grand prize opening C20 has opened (the predetermined number = 10 balls that trigger the end of the opening period of the second big prize opening C20 has entered) No), the opening period of the second big prize opening C20 ends (closes), and the shielding member C28 also closes when the opening period of the second big prize opening C20 ends. In this way, in the eighth round of the big hit relating to “7A” which is the first main game shielding member long open big hit symbol, the sixth game ball enters the second big prize opening C20, thereby the shielding member. C28 is opened for a long time, and the sixth game ball enters the specific area C22.

  Next, also in the lower part of the figure, when specifically explaining from the left in time series, first, in a state where the special game related to the big hit symbol “2A” which is the first main game shielding member short open big hit symbol is being executed. Yes, the 7th R of the special game has ended and the 2nd Grand Prize Winner C20 and the shielding member C28 are closed. The mouth C20 changes from the closed state to the open state. Next, when the first ball entering the second big prize opening C20 in the 8R is detected at the timing 2 in the figure, the shielding member C28 is short-opened (opened for 50 ms, during execution of the special game) When the game ball is continuously fired toward the second big prize opening C20, the game ball enters the specific area C22 for an open time during which it is difficult to enter).

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the sixth ball entering the second big prize opening C20 in the 8R will be detected, but the first main game shielding member short open big hit symbol "2A" In the eighth round in the big hit, the shielding member C28 is opened only by entering the first game ball into the second grand prize opening C20. Do not open. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, 29000 ms has passed since the second grand prize opening C20 has opened (the predetermined number = 10 balls that trigger the end of the opening period of the second big prize opening C20 has entered) No), the opening period of the second big prize opening C20 of the second big prize opening C20 ends (closes). In this way, even if the sixth game ball enters the second big prize opening C20 in the eighth round of big hit related to “2A” which is the first main game shielding member short open big hit symbol, the shielding member C28 is not released, and the sixth game ball does not enter the specific area C22.

  In this way, even in the same sorting game execution round (for example, the 8th R) during the execution of the special game, it is easy to enter the specific area C22 by changing the opening mode of the shielding member C28 according to the big hit symbol. And it is possible to create a round that is difficult to enter the specific area C22. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not to move to the probability varying gaming state or continue.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, the game ball that triggered the opening of the shielding member C28 can enter the specific area C22 as it is, and the shielding member It is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for a player who does not enter the specific area C22 even though C28 is long open.

  In addition, in 7th Embodiment, it is comprised so that it can perform the production | presentation aspect (for example, displaying "V") as if it is alerting | reporting that the game ball entered into the specific area C22 during the big hit. Alternatively, in such a case, it may be configured to execute the effect when a game ball enters the first grand prize opening C10 (actually, the specification in the second big prize opening C20 is specified). The effect may also be executed when a game ball enters the area C22). With such a configuration, in the big hits related to the big hit symbols other than “5A”, the opening mode of the first big winning opening C10 and the opening mode of the shielding member C28 are the same (the first big winning port C10 is long open). In this case, since the shielding member C28 is long open and the first big winning opening C10 is short opened, the shielding member C28 is short open). On the other hand, in the big hit relating to “5A”, the first big prize opening C10 is short open, but the shielding member C28 is long open. At the time of the jackpot execution related to “5A”, the player recognizes that the game ball does not enter the first jackpot C10 and therefore does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends. Shield member C28 is long open Because gaming ball has entered the special specific region C22, the game state after jackpot completion has a probability change game condition. Since it can be configured in this way, a predetermined condition (for example, symbol variation is executed 10 times after the big hit ends, a notification lottery executed for each symbol variation is won, etc.) after the big hit relating to “5A” is established. When satisfied, you may comprise so that the effect which alert | reports that the present game state is a probability fluctuation | variation game state may be performed. With this configuration, the special winning opening having the specific area C22 for determining whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game is set as the second large winning opening C20, while entering the specific area C22. By making the game ball enter the first grand prize opening C10 as an opportunity to execute the effect related to the ball (the effect suggesting the game state after the end of the special game) (that is, to the transition to the probability variation game state) Even when actually entering the specific area C22, the winning opening having the specific area C22 and the winning opening relating to the production suggesting the transition to the probability variation gaming state triggered by the entry) It can be configured not to execute the effect that the game ball has entered the specific area C22, and by providing a big hit (in this example, a big hit related to 5A) as such an effect mode, 1 grand prize Recognizing that there was no transition to the probability-variable gaming state by seeing the effects during the special game triggered by entering the C10, I was disappointed, but the gaming state after the end of the special game is actually the probability-changing gaming state (Because the shielding member C28 inside the second grand prize opening C20 is long open and a game ball has entered), and thereafter recognized that it is in a probability variation gaming state (the effect to that effect is executed) It will be exciting at the moment, and the fun of the game will be enhanced. In addition, even when there is no entry in the specific area C22 of the second grand prize opening C20, an effect that suggests the transition to the probability variation gaming state or the continuation triggered by the entry into the first big prize opening Can be executed. Further, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 in the second grand prize opening C20, the same effect as the effect mode as if the game ball has been notified to the specific area C22 described above In a predetermined condition (if an ascension effect that is a specific effect occurs during a big hit, it is not the first hit on the first main game side but the second run on the second main game side. If it is a big hit after the sword, etc., the notification mode of the production may be different from the case where the production is not under the predetermined condition (the production mode under the predetermined condition has a smaller display area and is not conspicuous) ,etc). Note that the ascension effect is a specific condition (the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number of times during consecutive games (a state where the jackpot symbol is continuously stopped in the time-saving game state), There is a relatively large number of game balls that can be acquired, such as a specific big hit (the number of executed rounds is 16 rounds) executed after satisfying the total number of prize balls acquired in the resort reaches a predetermined number, etc. This is an effect that occurs in a big hit.

(Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment)
In the seventh embodiment, in the distribution game execution round in the special game, the shielding member C28 is configured to start to open by the game ball entering the second grand prize opening C20. The configuration of the pachinko gaming machine that is provided is not limited to the seventh embodiment. Therefore, in the distribution game execution round in the special game, the configuration is such that the shielding member C28 starts to open by the entrance of the game ball to the second big prize opening C20, and the configuration different from the seventh embodiment, Hereinafter, a modification example 1 from the seventh embodiment will be described, and only changes from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of Step 1850 (second) in FIG. 107 in Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. The change from the seventh embodiment is step 3050 (seventh variation 1), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the shielding member drive control process in step 1900 (seventh), step 3050 is performed. In (seventh variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an opening / closing timing control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1866.

  Next, FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the opening / closing timing control process according to the subroutine of Step 3050 (seventh modified 1) in FIG. 112 in Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. First, in step 3052, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the currently executed round is a distributed game execution round (in this example, 4th R, 6th R, 8th R). In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the release timer MP54t has newly reached the release timing. Note that there are a plurality of opening timings for the second grand prize opening C20 in the first modification from the seventh embodiment. Specifically, the elapsed time from the start of the round is 0 ms, 4000 ms, 8000 ms, 12000 ms, 16000 ms, 20000 ms, 24000 ms. It is the timing. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUMC of the main control board M gives an opening timing arrival command (a command to the sub-control board S side, indicating that it has reached the opening timing of the second big prize opening C20. ) Is set, and the flow shifts to Step 3066. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3054, in step 3058, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the release timer MP54t has newly reached the closing timing. Note that there are a plurality of closing timings of the second grand prize opening C20 in Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. Specifically, the elapsed time from the start of the round is 2000 ms, 6000 ms, 10000 ms, 14000 ms, 18000 ms, 22000 ms, 26000 ms. It is the timing. It is also closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls enter the second grand prize opening C20 in the same round. In the case of Yes in step 3058, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 3060 that the closing timing determined to have been reached in step 3058 is the round final closing timing (when the round in the currently executed distributed game execution round ends) It is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the second big prize opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 3060, in step 3062, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the closing timing arrival command (the command to the sub-control board S side, and the closing timing of the second big prize opening C20 other than the final closing timing) Command) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3066. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3060, in step 3064, the CPUMC of the main control board M ends the round end command (the command to the sub-control board S side, and the distributed game execution round being executed ends. A command indicating that the closing timing has been reached is set, and the process proceeds to step 3066. Note that if the answer is No in Step 3052 or Step 3058, the process proceeds to Step 3066. In addition, the opening / closing timing (opening period) of the second grand prize opening C20 in the distribution game execution round is not limited to the timing shown in the figure. For example, “500 ms opening → 3500 ms closing → 500 ms opening → 3500 ms closing ...” As described above, it may be configured to repeat the opening of 500 ms and the closing of 3500 ms (one closing period is longer than one opening period). In such a configuration, the 500 ms release period is shorter than 600 ms (100 shots per minute), which is the interval at which one game ball is launched. In addition, the number of times the second grand prize opening C20 is opened in the distribution game execution round (the number of times of closing → opening) is the number of counts (the number of times the distribution game execution round ends) (The number of game balls entered) may be configured to be larger than the number of game balls), or as the opening mode of the second big prize opening C20 in the distribution game execution round, “500 ms open → 1000 ms closed → 500 ms open → 1000 ms closed → 10000 ms It may be configured such that a short opening (opening of 500 ms) is executed a plurality of times and then a long opening (opening of 10,000 ms) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to configure so that game balls corresponding to the number of counts can easily enter in the sorting game execution round (entrance of game balls corresponding to the number of counts is easy to secure).

  Next, in step 3066, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second grand prize opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 3066, in step 3068, the CPUMC of the main control board M makes a game ball entry command (a command to the sub control board S side, and every time a game ball enters the second big prize opening C20. Command) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1866). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3066, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1866).

  Next, FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 in FIG. 17 in Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. The change from the seventh embodiment is step 2650 (seventh variation 1), that is, the big hit being executed by the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2414-2 (seventh) is on the first main game side. If it is determined that it is a big hit, in step 2650 (seventh variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a first main game big hit effect display control process, which will be described later, and a step 2414-8 (seventh). ).

  Next, FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the first main game big hit effect display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2650 (seventh modified 1) in FIG. 114 in Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. First, in step 2652, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an opening timing arrival command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on an opening flag (a flag that is turned on while the second big prize opening C20 in the distribution game execution round is open), and step 2672 Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, in step 2656, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a closing timing arrival command from the main control board M side is received. In the case of Yes in step 2656, in step 2658, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the closing probability change effect (the second large winning opening C20 is closed and the shielding member C28 is opened long). Set a command to execute a production that suggests the possibility. Next, in steps 2660 and 2662, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the opening flag, and turns off the opening probability change effect execution flag (the flag that is turned on during the execution of the opening probability change effect described later). Then, the process proceeds to step 2672. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2656, in step 2664, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a round end command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2664, in step 2666, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for ending the closed-probability effect. Next, in Step 2668 and Step 2670, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the opening flag and the opening probability change effect execution flag, and proceeds to Step 2672. Note that if the answer is No in step 2664, the process proceeds to step 2672.

  Next, in step 2672, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the releasing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2672, in step 2674, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a game ball entry command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2673, in step 2676, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the open-time certain change effect execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2676, in step 2678, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs an opening probability change effect (executed in a state where the second big prize opening C20 is open, is the shielding member C28 opened long? A command for executing an effect that informs the result of whether or not is set. Next, in step 2680, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the opening probability variation effect execution flag, and proceeds to the next processing {step 2414-8 (seventh) processing}. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2672, step 2674, or step 2676, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2414-8 (seventh) process}. In the big hits related to some of the big win symbols on the first main game side (for example, 7A), the effects during the big hit, the opening mode of the second big prize opening C20, etc. are set on the second main game side. You may comprise so that it may become the same as the big hit which concerns on the big hit design (for example, 7B).

  Next, FIG. 116 is an operation diagram relating to a special game (especially a distributed game execution round) in Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, in the eighth round, which is a distribution game execution round, 29000 ms which is the opening period of the big winning opening and 60 ms which is the preparation period of the next round are shown. The lower part of the figure shows “7A” as a jackpot symbol, that is, when the shielding member C28 is long open (when the game ball continues to be launched toward the second big prize opening C20, the game ball enters the specific area C22. The opening mode of the big winning opening C20 in the case where the big hit symbol that is deterministic or easy to enter will be described in time series. First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, under the situation where the second grand prize opening C20 is closed, the second grand prize opening C20 is released from the closed state by the start of the distribution game execution round 8R. It becomes a state. Next, when the first ball entering the second big prize opening C20 in the 8R is detected at the timing 2 in the figure, the shielding member C28 is short-opened (opened for 50 ms, during execution of the special game) When the game ball is continuously fired toward the second big prize opening C20, the game display ball SG is subjected to a certain change effect at the time of opening at the same time as the game ball is difficult to enter the specific area C22.

  Next, at timing 3 in the figure, the shielding member C28 is changed from the open state to the closed state (short opening of the shielding member C28 is completed). Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the second big prize opening C20 is closed, and at the same time, the effect display device SG is executed with the effect display device SG. Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the second big prize opening C20 changes from the closed state to the open state. Next, when the second ball entering the second big prize opening C20 in the 8R is detected at the timing of 6 in the figure, the certainty effect at opening is executed on the effect display device SG. Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the second big prize opening C20 is closed, and at the same time, the effect display device SG is executed in the effect display device SG. Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure (the second grand prize opening C20 is in a closed state, and the production display device SG is performing a certain change effect at the time of closing), the second big prize opening C20 is released from the closed state. It becomes a state. Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, when the sixth ball entering the second big prize opening C20 in the 8R is detected, the effect display device SG performs the opening-time certain change effect. The effect mode of the opening probability change effect will be described in detail later, but after the special game is finished, an effect that informs the transition to the probability variation game state is executed, and then the opening probability change effect and the closing probability change. The effect is configured to have a similar effect mode (the opening-time certain change effect may be executed from the timing 8 in the figure to the end of the running round). Next, at the timing of 10 in the figure, the second big prize opening C20 changes from the open state to the closed state. Next, at the timing of 11 in the figure, the second big prize opening C20 changes from the closed state to the open state. Next, at the timing of 12 in the figure, the second grand prize opening C20 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and at the same time, the shielding member C28 is also changed from the open state to the closed state. When 29000 ms elapses from the first opening of the second big prize opening C20 in the round (the tenth ball entering the second big prize opening C20 is not detected), the second big prize opening C20 is closed. At the same time, the shielding member C28 is also closed}. Thus, in the closed state of the second grand prize opening C20, a probable change effect at the time of closing is executed, and when the second big prize opening C20 is changed from the closed state to the open state, It is configured to switch to a certain change effect when opened.

  Next, FIG. 117 is a first main game big hit effect image diagram in the first modification from the seventh embodiment. An example of the probable change effect during closing and the probable change effect during opening will be described in chronological order with reference to the drawings. First, 8R is started from the upper left in the figure, and the second grand prize opening C20 is in the open state from the closed state, but the game ball has not yet entered the second big prize opening C20. Next, when the first ball entering the second grand prize opening C20 in the 8th R is detected, the bran opens on the effect display device SG, and the opening probability change effect (the ball entered the second big prize port C20). A skull is displayed as an effect indicating whether or not the shielding member C28 has been opened for a long time by a game ball, and an effect that the shielding member C28 is not opened for a long time by the entry of the gaming ball is executed. . Next, when the second grand prize winning opening C20 is closed again, the possibility that the shielding member C28 will be opened for a long time as a closing-time certain change effect (effect suggesting the possibility that the shielding member C28 may be opened long) is relatively. A low probability (30%) is displayed. Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is opened, and when the first game ball enters from the opening, the bran opens again as a certain change effect at the time of opening, and a skull is displayed on the effect display device SG, The effect that the shielding member C28 is not opened for a long time by the entry of the game ball is executed.

  Next, when the second grand prize opening C20 is closed, the shielding member C28 is opened for a long time in the effect display device SG as a probable change effect at closing (an effect suggesting the possibility that the shielding member C28 opens long). A message indicating that the probability is relatively high (70%) is displayed. Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is opened, and when the first game ball is entered from the opening, the bran opens again as a certain change effect at the time of opening, and “WIN !!” is displayed on the effect display device SG. Is displayed, and the effect that the shielding member C28 is long opened by the entry of the game ball is executed, and the transition to the probability variation gaming state is notified {the subsequent probability change effect at the time of opening and the probability change effect at the time of closing Is the same production mode (the display of “WIN !!” is maintained)}. When a game ball does not enter the specific area C22 at the last release in a certain distribution game execution round, or when a game ball does not enter the specific area C22 at the predetermined number of releases. Displays an effect indicating that it does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is finished (to shift to the non-probability variation gaming state) on the effect display device SG (for example, displays the characters “LOSE...”). It may be configured.

  Such an effect may be an interrupting effect such as a cut-in effect when the opening probability change effect, or a series of effects of the closing probability change effect and the opening probability change effect (for example, a battle effect in the closing probability change effect). A series of stories with a probabilistic effect at closing and a promising effect at opening, such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation by the strength of the enemy, and an effect that informs that the probability variation has been confirmed by the victory effect of the battle as a promising effect when opening It may be configured to be an effect such as a moving image along the line), or may be only an effect of a certain change effect at the time of closing or a certain change effect at the time of opening. Further, when the game ball enters the specific area C22, the probability variation effect at the time of closing or the probability variation effect at the time of opening is terminated (for example, after the effect display device SG suddenly blacks out, the letters WIN are displayed). The production may be continued regardless of the ball entering the specific area C22. In addition, for example, the effect may be configured to be executed based on a game ball entering the first grand prize opening C10 (a big prize opening that does not have the specific area C22). Further, in this example, it is only necessary to have one big winning opening having the specific area C22, and it is not always necessary to have a plurality of big winning openings. In particular, the big winning opening having the specific area C22 (for example, the second winning opening) is triggered by the entrance to the big winning opening having no specific area C22 as described above (for example, the first large winning opening C10). In the case where the effect of notifying the entry to the specific area C22 of C20) is not performed, etc., there is one large winning opening {a large winning opening having the specific area C22 (for example, the second large winning opening C20). Can take a configuration. In addition, as the shape and opening / closing mode of the prize winning opening, a high-speed opening / closing pattern (for example, “0.2 second opening → 0.2 second closing → 0.2 second opening”) is used. And an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is a large winning opening, and the opening can be closed and opened (so-called slide) For example, when one game ball enters the opening that is opened, the opening is closed, and then when the next ball enters the opening that is opened again, the opening is closed again. In this way, it may be configured such that a single ball is entered, and for each incoming ball, an effect suggesting the long opening of the shielding member C28 can be synchronized with the incoming ball as an opportunity. By configuring as described above, it becomes possible to further increase the degree of attention to the big winning opening in the player's distribution game execution round, and the interest is enhanced.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment, in the distribution game execution round in the special game, to the second big prize opening C20. It is configured such that the shielding member C28 can start opening when the game ball enters, and the second big prize opening C20 is configured to open and close a plurality of times in the distribution game execution round. Further, when the second grand prize opening C20 is closed, when the opening is an effect that suggests the possibility that the shielding member C28 may be opened for a long time when the game ball entered the second big prize opening C20 is opened next time. Probability change effect is executed, and in the open state of the second grand prize opening C20, the probability change effect at the time of opening to notify the result of whether or not the shielding member C28 has been long opened by the game ball that entered the second big prize port C20 By performing the configuration, the player pays attention to each one of the game balls that enter the second big prize opening C20 during the distribution game execution round, and the game during the big hit Will be more interesting.

(Eighth embodiment)
In the third embodiment, whether or not a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening C20 during the small hit game enters the V prize opening C27 is determined by the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25. Although the game nature determined by the drive timing of the above is created, the configuration using the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration using the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 is defined as an eighth embodiment, and only differences from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 118 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 53 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a hold of the first main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the first main game symbol display process described above, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401-1, in step 1400 (2), the second main game symbol display process described above is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550). As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when there is both the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side, the hold on the first main game side is given priority. Configured to digest.

  Next, FIG. 119 is an example of a first main game success / failure lottery table (second main game success / failure lottery table) in the eighth embodiment. As shown in this example, in the 8th embodiment, in the winning lottery on the second main game side, the probability of winning a small hit is 1020/1024, and a small probability with a high probability (almost one-tenth) Is configured to win. In this example, as shown in the figure, the probability of winning a small hit is configured to be higher than the probability of winning or losing a big win, but the winning probability is only an example. There is no limitation to this. In addition, the small winning symbol on the first main game side is one type of “7AK”, whereas the small winning symbol on the second main game side has two types of “3BK” and “7BK”. Yes. In addition, the first main game side small hit symbol group (as described above, the small hit symbol group is a small hit symbol group) may be provided three types of A, B, C, depending on the small hit symbol group The opening mode of the second large winning opening C20 and / or the lower shielding member C25 at the time of small hit may be different. When the small hit symbol group is A or B, the game ball is placed at the V winning opening C27 at the small hit. When the small winning symbol group is C, the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 when the small hit symbol group is C, while the second big winning hole C20 and / or the lower shielding member C25 is open. You may comprise so that it may become the open aspect of the 2nd big winning opening C20 and / or the lower shielding member C25 which are easy to ball. It should be noted that such a configuration of the second big prize opening C20 and / or the lower shielding member C25 according to the small winning symbol group may be applied to the small winning symbol group on the second main game side. Further, depending on whether the small hit symbol group is A, B, or C, the number of rounds executed in the big hit triggered by entering the V winning opening C27 may be different. The number of rounds executed in the big hit triggered by the winning of the V winning opening C27 and the V winning opening according to the small hitting symbols in the group in each of the small hit symbol groups A, B and C. The number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot triggered by entering C27 may be different. In addition, with such a configuration, a game ball can easily enter the V winning opening C27 during a small hit (regardless of the small hit symbol) For example, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine having a configuration in which a game ball enters the V prize opening C27.

  Next, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 (eighth) in FIG. 34 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 1698-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by entering the V winning opening C27. In the case of Yes in step 1698-1, in step 1698-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is a long / short / big hit symbol {after the big hit ends, the short time counter MP52c and the second main game short number counter MP52c-2 It is determined whether it is a big hit symbol in which the shortest number of times set is relatively large, and in this example, 4B, 5B, 7A, and 7B)}. Next, in step 1698-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “54” as a predetermined number which is a relatively large number to the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1698-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M is relative to the counter value of the second main game short-time counter MP52c-2 (a counter that is subtracted only at the end of the second main game symbol change). “50”, which is a large number of times, is set. Thus, in this example, the number of changes in the time-reduced game state given after the end of the special game is different depending on the jackpot symbol.

  Here, “54”, which is the predetermined number set in the counter value of the short time counter MP52c, is changed to “50”, which is the predetermined number set in the counter value of the second main game short time counter MP52c-2. It is a value obtained by adding “4” which is the upper limit number of one main game suspension. By configuring in this way, for example, when the first main game side has retained (for example, the maximum of 4) after the special game related to “7A”, which is a long and short winning bonus symbol, has ended. Even when all of the symbol variations related to the remaining hold on the first main game side are executed, “50” is guaranteed as the number of balls entered into the second major winning opening C20 in the time-saving game state. (The symbol variation on the second main game side can be executed 50 times).

  Next, in step 1698-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a decrement counter that is subtracted by the processing in step 3800 (eighth) described later in the time-saving small / medium continuous counter MP53c { “50”, which is a predetermined number, is set in the counter value of the counter that is subtracted when there is no ball entering the V winning opening C27 in the winning small win, and the flow proceeds to Step 1698-17. At this time, “50”, which is the predetermined number of short / medium / small hit continuous counter MP53c, is the same as “50” set to the counter value of the second main game short-time counter MP52c-2 (described later, When the value of the predetermined number set in the counter value of the main game short time counter MP52c-2 is “2”, the predetermined number of time short / medium / small continuous counter MP53c is also “2”). In this way, by making the value set in the second main game short-time counter MP52c-2 the same as the value set in the short-time medium / small and medium continuous counter MP53c, the player sets the first main game symbol to the holding upper limit number ( In this example, even if the game progresses so as to change the second main game symbol after being changed by 4 times), and the winning combination is won as a result of the change of the first main game symbol, the short time medium / small / medium continuous counter By subtracting the counter value of MP53c, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player who has changed the first main game side gains. As described above, the counter value set in the short / medium / small / medium continuous counter MP53c differs depending on the type of the big hit symbol. It will differ depending on the type. Further, in the eighth embodiment, it may be configured not to set a value in the time-short / medium / small hit continuous counter MP53c after the big hit is completed (the time-saving gaming state is not ended because the small hits are continued in the time-saving gaming state). It may be configured so that when the time variation game state, the symbol variation that wins the small winning symbol is continuous, and when the gaming ball does not enter the V winning opening C27 at the small winning time, medium and small The counter value of the consecutive winning counter MP53 may be subtracted, or each time a small winning symbol is won in the time-saving gaming state, and every time a gaming ball does not enter the V winning opening C27 (small winning) The symbol variation to be won may not be continuous, and the symbol variation that becomes lost or the symbol variation that becomes big hit may be sandwiched).

  If the answer is No in step 1698-2 (that is, if the stopped jackpot symbol is 4A / 5A), in step 1698-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stopped symbol is short and short jackpot symbol {big hit. Is it a big hit symbol with a relatively small number of times set in the time-count counter MP52c and the second main game time-count counter MP52c-2 after the end, and in this example, it is 4A / 5A)} Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1698-3, in step 1698-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “6” as the predetermined number of times to the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1698-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “2” as a predetermined number which is a relatively small number of times of shortening in the counter value of the second main game time-of-times counter MP52c-2. Next, in step 1698-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “2”, which is a predetermined number, to the counter value of the time-short / medium / small continuous counter MP53c (decrement counter), and proceeds to step 1698-17. As described above, when “2” is set as the counter value of the second main game short-time counter MP52c-2, the counter value of the short-time small / medium / small continuous counter MP53c (decrement counter) is also the same value “2”. It has become.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1698-1 (that is, after the special game is ended after entering the V winning opening C27), in step 1698-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M is highly profitable. It is determined whether or not it is after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit symbol (a small hit symbol given a relatively large number of time reductions given at the end of the special game triggered by the small hit). In the case of Yes in step 1698-10, in step 1698-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “54” as the predetermined number to the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1698-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “50”, which is a relatively large number of times, to the counter value of the second main game time number counter MP52c-2. Next, in step 1698-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “50” which is the same as the number of times set in the second main game short-time counter MP52c-2 to the counter value of the short / medium / small consecutive hit counter MP53c (decrement counter). ”Is set, and the flow shifts to Step 1698-17.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1698-10, that is, if the stopped small hit symbol is “3BK”, in step 1698-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the short-time counter MP52c. “6” is set as the predetermined number of times. Next, in step 1698-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “2” as the predetermined number to the counter value of the second main game short time counter MP52c-2. Next, in step 1698-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “2”, which is a predetermined number, to the counter value of the time-short / medium / small continuous counter MP53c (decrement counter), and proceeds to step 1698-17. In the eighth embodiment, the counter values set in the hourly number counter MP52c and the hourly medium / small / medium continuous counter MP53c differ depending on the type of the big hit symbol or the type of the small hit symbol that triggered the big hit. It is configured. That is, when it is configured to have at least a specific group A and a specific group B as a small hit symbol that triggers a big hit, the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol) or the second identification information (for example, When the special game state (time-reduced game state) is entered after the end of the special game executed after the second main game symbol) is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group A (for example, 7AK, 7BK). The number of repetitions from the start of variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol) or the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol) to the stop display is a predetermined number A (for example, 54). Or after the number of repetitions from the start of variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol) to the stop display reaches the specific number of times A (for example, 50) (for example, Non-time-reduced gaming state), and the first identification information (for example, the first main gaming symbol) or the second identification information (for example, the second main gaming symbol) is specified group B (for example, 3AK) ), The first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol) is obtained when the specific game state (for example, the time-saving game state) is reached after the special game executed after the stop display in the stop display mode belonging to ) Or the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol) has reached a predetermined number of times B (for example, 6) from the start of the variable display to the stop display, or the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol) It is configured such that the normal gaming state (for example, non-time-reduced gaming state) is reached after the number of repetitions from the start of the variable display of the main game symbol) to the stop display reaches a specific number of times B (for example, 2 times).

  Next, in step 1698-17, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1698-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Even in the case of No in step 1698-3, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997). As described above, in the eighth embodiment, after the special game is over, there is a case where the state is shifted to the time-reduced game state and there is a case where the state is not shifted. Specifically, there is a case in which the transition to the time-reduced gaming state does not occur after the end of the special game in the symbol variation on the first main game side, but in the symbol variation on the second main game side, it is always time after the special game ends. It is comprised so that it may transfer to a shortened game state. In addition, as the number of time savings given after the end of the special game, there are a relatively large number of time savings and a relatively small number of time savings, and in any case, the maximum number of time savings given is the second This is the sum of the counter value set in the main game short time counter and the holding upper limit number on the first main game side. It should be noted that the number of time reductions that can be set in the time reduction number counter MP52c is less than 54 times (the number of time reductions that can be set in the second main game time reduction counter MP52c-2 is less than 50 times). In such a configuration, as the number of short times that can be set in the second main game short time counter MP52c-2, a value that is larger and smaller than the upper limit number (4 in this example) on the first main game side. You may comprise so that it may have at least. Also, the number of types of short time that can be given after the end of the big hit on the first main game side may be different from the number of types of short time that can be given after the end of the big hit on the second main game side, that is, "Number of types of short-time times that can be awarded after the end of the big hit that was executed when the first main game big hit symbol was stopped or after the big hit ended on the first main game side> The second main game big hit symbol is stopped Or the number of types of short-time times that can be given after the end of the big hit triggered by the second main game side's small hit, or "the first main game big hit symbol is stopped and executed The number of types of short time that can be awarded after the end of the jackpot or after the end of the jackpot triggered by the first main game side <the second main game after the end of the jackpot executed or the second main game Obonari triggered by small hits on the game side It may be time reduction type number of times "which may be granted after completion.

  Next, FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1700 (third) in FIG. 53 in the eighth embodiment. First, the difference from the third embodiment is Step 3800 (eighth). That is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag in step 1730, in step 3800 (eighth), the small hit related short time end determination process is executed, and the next process {step 1750 ( The process proceeds to (Process 3).

  Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the short hit-related short time end determination process according to the subroutine of Step 3800 in FIG. 121 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 3830, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is in a time saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3830, in step 3832, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27 during the small hit. In the case of Yes in step 3832, in step 3834, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the time medium / small / medium continuous counter MP 53 c (decrement counter).

  Next, at step 3836, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the continuous time value for the short time medium / small is zero. In the case of Yes in step 3836, in step 3838, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag. Next, in step 3840, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time short flag, and proceeds to the processing of step 3842. Note that the process proceeds to step 3842 also in the case of No in step 3830 or step 3832. Next, in step 3842, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the time-short / medium / small continuous counter MP53c to zero, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1750 (third)}. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3836, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1750 (third) process}.

  By configuring in this way, in the time-saving gaming state, when there is no ball entering the V winning opening C27 during the small hit, the counter value of the short time small / medium / small continuous counter MP53c is decremented by one to reduce the short / medium small / medium hit When the counter value of the continuous counter MP53c becomes 0 (that is, when a small hit without a ball entering the V winning opening C27 continues for a predetermined number of times during the small hit), the time-saving gaming state can be terminated, In a small hit game, if the player has not had a chance to enter the V prize opening C27 even though there is enough opportunity to enter the V prize opening C27, the symbol variation for the short time is executed. The time-saving gaming state can be terminated without doing so. The continuous number of such small hit games can be varied according to the big hit symbol.

  Here, in the eighth embodiment, the internal structure of the second big prize opening C20 has the same configuration as that of the third embodiment. In other words, whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 is determined based on the opening state of the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 provided in the second large winning opening C20. In this example, based on the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, the number of time reductions given thereafter can be different. More specifically, the probability of a game ball entering the V winning opening C27 in one small hit game is about one-fourth (the configuration is the same as in the third embodiment, This is because the ratio of the lower shielding member C25 in the open state and the ratio in the closed state is 1: 3). That is, a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 once in four small hit games, and this value of “4” is “50, which is a relatively large time-saving number executed in this example. The numerical value is smaller than “2” and larger than “2” which is a relatively small number of times. With this configuration, when “2”, which is a relatively small number of times, is given as the number of time reductions, a game ball is entered into the V winning opening C27 in either of two small hit games. If it is possible to do so, the number of time reductions will be given again after the jackpot triggered by the game ball entering the V winning opening C27 (it will be a consecutive play), 1 in 2 small hit games It is relatively difficult to achieve the entry to the / 4 V winning opening C27. On the other hand, when “50” times, which is a relatively large number of time reductions, are given, if a game ball can be placed in the V winning opening C27 in any of the 50 small hit games, After the big hit with the entrance of the game ball to the winning opening C27, the number of times will be given again (it will be consecutive), and a 1/4 V winning opening with 50 small hit games It is easy to achieve entry into C27. In this way, by providing a plurality of small hit symbols with different degrees of expectation that the time-reduced gaming state continues (runs continuously) depending on the number of time savings given, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Moreover, in this example, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports the number of rounds performed in a special game. Examples of the notification method include a round lamp (not shown), a method of displaying on the effect display device SG, and the like. An example in the case of displaying with a round lamp (not shown) will be described in detail. First, it is determined that all rounds executed regardless of the opening mode of the big prize opening are actual rounds, and that the game ball does not substantially enter the big winning opening as the opening mode of the big winning opening, or The short opening round that is easy to enter and the long opening round that is definite or easy to enter the game ball substantially into the big winning opening are configured. When configured in this way, for example, as a big hit on the first main game side, a big hit A1 that is executed when a big hit symbol with a long open round of 4R and a short open round of 4R is triggered, and a long open round A big hit A2 that is executed when the big win symbol is 6R and the short open round is 2R, and the big winning A2 that is 4R and the short open round is 4R. The big hit A3 executed with the entrance of the ball and the big hit executed with the entrance of the game ball into the V winning opening C27 in the small hit with the long open round 6R and the short open round 2R A4 is a big hit on the second main game side, which is executed when the big hit symbol is 11R and the short open round is 4R. 1 and a big hit B2 that is executed when a big hit symbol stop with a long open round of 13R and a short open round of 2R, and a small hit V with a long open round of 11R and a short open round of 4R A big hit B3 executed when a game ball enters the winning opening C27 and a long hit round of 13R and a short open round of 2R are inserted into the V winning opening C27 during the small hit round C27. When configured to have a big hit B4 executed as an opportunity, the round lamps that are lit and displayed at A1 and A2 are lit and displayed at A3 and A4. As for the round lamp, the lamp indicating “9R” is lit, the lamp indicating “15R” is lit, and the lamp indicating “15R” is lit, and the lamp indicating “3R” is lit and displayed as B3 and B4. Ndoranpu may be configured such that a lamp indicating "16R" is lighted. Here, when the big hit symbol is stopped and the big hit is executed, the ratio (selection rate) executed between A1 and A2 is triggered by the game ball entering the V winning opening C27 during the small hit. When the big hit is executed, it may be the same value or substantially the same value as the executed ratio (selectivity) of A3 and A4. Note that “substantially the same” here means that the error is desirably less than 1%, and is substantially the same when, for example, A1: A2 = 30: 70 and A3: A4 = 29.9: 70.1, etc. Can be considered. Similarly, for the big win on the second main game side, the ratio (selection rate) executed between B1 and B2 when the big hit symbol is stopped and the big hit is executed is the same as the V winning prize C27 during the small hit. It may be the same value or substantially the same value as the ratio (selection rate) executed between B3 and B4 in the case where the big hit is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball. In addition, in a non-time-reduced gaming state, a big hit is executed by stopping the big hit symbol or a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27 during a small hit executed by stopping the small hit symbol When the big hit is executed by the ratio, the ratio of the time reduction gaming state after the big hit is completed (or the ratio of the non-time reduction gaming state), and the big hit is executed by the stoppage of the big hit symbol in the time reduction gaming state When the big hit is executed due to the game ball entering the V winning opening C27 during the small hit executed by the winning or the small hit symbol is stopped, the ratio of becoming a time-reduced gaming state after the big hit ends ( Or, the ratio of the non-time-saving gaming state) may be different. In such a configuration, a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during a small hit executed when the big hit is executed due to the big hit symbol being stopped in the time-saving gaming state or when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the big hit is executed due to the ball, the big hit is executed because the big hit symbol is stopped in the non-time-reduced gaming state or the small hit executed when the small hit symbol is stopped. It may be configured such that the ratio of entering the time-saving gaming state after the end of the big hit is higher than when the big hit is executed due to the game ball entering the winning opening C27. You may apply only to a big hit, and you may comprise so that it may apply to any big hit of the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side. Further, on the second main game side, regardless of whether the gaming state in which the big hit symbol is stopped or the gaming state in which the small hit symbol is stopped is the time reduction gaming state, it shifts to the time reduction gaming state after the big hit is over. The ratio becomes relatively high (for example, when the first main game big hit symbol is stopped or the first main game small hit symbol is stopped in the time reduction game state, the time shifts to the time reduction game state after the end of the subsequent big hit. It may be configured to be the same as the ratio. In addition, when the second main game small hit symbol is stopped in the non-time-saving game state, the rate of transition to the time-saving game state is relatively low after the big hit with the small hit as an opportunity (for example, time You may comprise so that it may not transfer to a shortened game state. In this way, even if the number of long open rounds is different, the same round lamp lights up for the big win that is executed when the first main game side jackpot symbol is stopped, and the second main game side jackpot symbol is stopped. Even if the number of long open rounds is different, the same round lamp is lit and the big hit executed with the opportunity is triggered by the game ball entering the V winning opening C27 in the small hit on the first main game side Even if the number of long open rounds is different, the same round lamp is lit up and the big hit executed is executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit on the second main game side. The jackpot is configured such that the same round lamp is lit even if the number of long open rounds is different. The above A1 to A4 and B1 to B4 are merely examples, and there is no problem even if the number of types of jackpots or the distribution between the long open round and the short open round is changed, for example, all rounds to be executed Triggered when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during a small hit where all the executed rounds become long open rounds, triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol that becomes a long open round It is also possible to provide a big hit (except for the mode of opening the round during the small hit). In addition, the number of short open rounds and long open rounds described above is, when the big hit to be executed is a big hit executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit, The number of times excluding the round executed at the small hit (the first short opening round) is shown. In other words, the big hit executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit is a big hit executed after the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit. The number of rounds executed in the big hit is the number of rounds executed after the round in which the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit (excluding the currently executed round). The round lamps lit at A1, A2, B1, and B2 are set to “15R”, and the round lamps lit at A3, A4, B3, and B4 are set to “16R” (the round lamps that can be lit are “15R”). And a lamp indicating “16R”). In addition, it is possible to set the number of all actual rounds to 16R without providing a round ramp (in the case of having a round ramp, a big hit that is executed when a big hit symbol on the first main game side is stopped, The big hit executed when the main game side hits the big hit symbol, the big win executed when the first main game side hits the V winning slot C27 during the small hit and the second main win A lamp indicating “16R” may be turned on for all the big hits that are executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit on the game side). In such a case, the same effect as the effect during the small hit is executed as the effect during the big hit, and when the same effect as the effect during the small hit ends, the big hit is actually executed. You may perform the effect which alert | reports that it was in. Such an effect is executed when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening C27 during the big hit, and when the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the big win. The same effect as that performed when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit (actually, it is a big hit, so the game ball enters the V winning opening C27). However, even if the big hit is not executed further, the game ball is won at the V winning opening C27 during the small hit, and then the effect is executed to show that the big win is executed). Good.

(Ninth embodiment)
In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, it is configured such that the timing at which the suspension occurs is digested in the oldest order, and the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit execution, A description has been given of a game where the big hit is executed after the end of the small hit, but it is possible to further create a novel game different from the above-described game. Therefore, different from the first modification from the third embodiment, a configuration in which a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit execution, so that a big hit is executed after the small hit ends. Is a ninth embodiment, and only the differences from the first modification from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 123 is a drawing showing the basic structure of the front side of a gaming machine in the ninth embodiment.

  First, the ninth embodiment has two large winning openings and two main game start openings having the same shape as the sixth embodiment. Further, the first main game start port BA10-2 in the sixth embodiment is the second main game start port B10, and the second main game start port B10 in the sixth embodiment is the first main game start port BA10-2. It has become. That is, the first main game start port A10-2 and the second main game start port B10 are interchanged with the sixth embodiment. Further, when the right hand is executed in the ninth embodiment, it is configured such that a game ball can enter the first big prize opening C10, the first main game start opening BA10-2, and the second main game start opening B10. ing. In addition, since the characteristic structure of a big prize opening and a main game start opening is the same as 6th Embodiment, description is omitted. In addition, the board surface structure etc. in 9th Embodiment are not limited to this, You may comprise in the following game machines. (1) When one game ball enters while the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is opened, the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is closed (second main game start opening (Only one game ball can enter each time the electric accessory B11d is opened), (2) the second main game start opening electric accessory is positioned upstream of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d. Having a member that alternately distributes the game balls to a route in which the game balls flow down toward B11d and a route in which the game balls do not flow down toward the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d, (3) The game balls distributed by the members can be merged at a position downstream of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d and upstream of the prize winning opening (which route (4) The game balls that have flowed down can also enter the grand prize opening) Even if it is configured to have a general prize opening upstream (in the vicinity of the prize winning opening, which is a ball entry opening that generates a prize ball when a game ball enters), the same as described later in the tenth embodiment) Good.

  Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of Step 1200 in FIG. 4 in the ninth embodiment. First, differences from the first modification from the third embodiment are Step 1242 (Ninth) and Step 1243 (Ninth). That is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the opening of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d in Step 1236, or the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the state of releasing the electric accessory in Step 1202 If it is determined that there is a game ball, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1242 (9th) whether or not a game ball has entered the second main game start port B10. In the case of Yes in step 1242 (ninth), in step 1244, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is closed. As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when one game ball enters the second main game start opening B10, the release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is completed, that is, When the auxiliary game side is elected and the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is opened once, only one ball can be held on the second main game side, and the second main game start port electric accessory It is configured so that a plurality of holds on the second main game side do not occur in one release of B11d. By configuring in this way, it is possible to ensure the gameability of how many times the auxiliary game side can be won before the time-saving game state ends. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1242 (9th), in step 1243 (9th), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory release period has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1243 (9th), in step 1244, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is closed. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1243 (ninth), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1300). In addition, regarding the “auxiliary game symbol variation time” on the right side of the figure, when the auxiliary game time short flag is off (that is, when the game state is a non-time-reduced game state), the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is 5 When the auxiliary game short time flag is on (that is, when the game state is the time reduction game state), the auxiliary game symbol variation time is 3 seconds and the auxiliary game short time flag is off. The fluctuation time is shorter than that. In addition, it is 1016/1024 (about 1/1) that is the probability of winning a small hit on the second main game side, and the probability that the auxiliary game symbol is won is when the auxiliary game short flag is on. Is 169/1024, and is 2/1024 when the auxiliary game short flag is off, so the probability of winning a small hit on the second main game side is higher than the probability of winning the auxiliary game . Although details will be described later, in the ninth embodiment, the number of time reductions is one, and when the time-reduced game state is entered, the first main game symbol basically starts to change (first This is not the case when there is no hold on the one main game side), and the variation time is only 30 seconds. Further, the winning probability on the auxiliary game side in the time-reduced game state (auxiliary game short flag on) is about 1/6, and the variation time is 3 seconds. Therefore, the auxiliary game symbol can be changed 10 times on average until the time-saving game state is ended (until the period in which the auxiliary game state is on), and about 10 The number of wins on the auxiliary game side, which is a winning probability of 6, is a gameability (winning on the auxiliary game side, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened, the second main game side As a result, the recreational resort continues to play). In addition, when the auxiliary game short flag is on, there may be a plurality of types of variation time of the auxiliary game symbol (time set in the variation management timer). In such a case, the auxiliary game symbol is stopped. The average value of the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol when the symbol is a winning symbol is configured to be longer than the average value of the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol when the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a loss symbol. May be. The type of the opening pattern of the second main game start port electric player B11d when the second main game start port electric player B11d is opened due to winning on the auxiliary game side is that the auxiliary game short time flag is off. In this case, one type may be used, and one type may be used when the auxiliary game time short flag is turned on.

  In addition, you may comprise as follows as an effect performed at the sub control board | substrate S side in a gaming machine like 9th Embodiment. (1) Although the actual variation time of the first main game symbol is 30 seconds, the countdown display (display in which the time is subtracted) on the effect display device SG is subtracted from 25 seconds, and the countdown display is “End” is displayed on the effect display device SG for 5 seconds after the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed after 0 seconds, but the auxiliary game side is elected in the 5 seconds. When it becomes, a rebirth effect (for example, “Still still!” Is displayed) is executed. (2) 20th from the start of the variation of the first main game symbol with 0 on the second main game side. When the second has elapsed, the remaining 5 seconds (remaining time of the countdown effect) is set as the first effect tendency (the so-called pinch effect). , Hold on the second main game side When 20 seconds have passed in the state of more than the number, the remaining 5 seconds (remaining time of the countdown effect) is the second effect tendency (the effect of notifying that the state advantageous to the player continues, or You may comprise so that a countdown effect may be performed continuously. In addition, when comprised in this way, a pinch effect is not an effect mode which asks whether the auxiliary game side wins or not for every change of the auxiliary game symbol, but is a moving image that is continuously displayed in the above-mentioned 5 seconds. (For example, an effect of an inferior state being attacked by an enemy) may be executed. (3) At the time when the first main game symbol starts changing after the jackpot ends, if the auxiliary game symbol that started changing during the jackpot is changing, the display regarding the change of the auxiliary game symbol is an effect display. When the auxiliary game symbol is won without being executed by the device SG, an effect that the auxiliary game symbol is won, or a game ball is directed toward the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d. An effect that instructs to fire is not executed. From the change of the next auxiliary game symbol that has been won, the display related to the change of the auxiliary game symbol, the effect that the auxiliary game symbol has been won, and the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d You may comprise so that the effect which instruct | indicates to emit a game ball may be performed. In the above-described configuration, when the game is in the time-saving game state, the effect display device SG performs a countdown effect from the end of the big hit, displays a display related to the change in the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game side is selected as winning. In this case, there is exemplified a case in which an effect of instructing that a game ball is to be fired toward the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is executed.

  Next, FIG. 125 is a main game table 3 according to the ninth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, as shown in this example, in the time-reduced game state, the variation time that can be selected when the result of success or failure of the first main game symbol is lost is only one type of 30 seconds. . The variation time of 30 seconds is a time value that is ten times the variation time of 3 seconds, which is the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state. Further, “10” that is a multiple of the time value is larger than “6” of the denominator of 1/6, which is the normal symbol winning probability. Note that this variation time is the same variation time (when lost) regardless of the number of holds on the first main game side. In addition, the variation time (at the time of losing) of the second main game symbol during the time-reduced gaming state is the relative shortest variation time (1 second). Since it is configured in this manner, the auxiliary game symbol can be changed on average 10 times in the time-saving game state, and the auxiliary game winning probability is about 1/6. By the time the variation (design variation on the first main game side) ends, the auxiliary game side will be elected on average one or more times (one or more hold on the second main game side will occur on average) . In addition, you may comprise so that a loss may not be selected as a result of a lottery determination on the second main game side (only either a big hit or a small win will be selected). In addition, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol in the time-saving gaming state is as follows: big hit time → 25 seconds, small hit time → 30 seconds, lost time → 30 seconds, big hit time → 30 seconds, small hit time → 30 seconds Further, it may be configured such that only one type of variation time is selected for each of the big hit, the small hit, and the lost, such as 30 seconds when lost.

  Next, FIG. 126 is a main flowchart showing main game symbol display processing in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)}, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to a subroutine, The process proceeds to the process (the process of Step 1550). Note that the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment is configured so as to be digested in order of entry (digested from the oldest when the suspension occurs). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-described parallel lottery may be executed (similar to the fifth embodiment), or the first main game side priority digestion or the second main game side priority digestion (this implementation) You may comprise in the same way as a form.

  Next, FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 53 in the ninth embodiment. The differences from the first modification of the third embodiment are step 1411-1 (9th) and step 1411-2 (9th). That is, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines a stop symbol relating to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination (see the main game table 2), and step 1411-1 ( Ninth, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is zero. In the case of No in step 1411-1 (9th), in step 1411-2 (9th), the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game side random number and the lottery result, and the variation mode (variation) regarding the main game symbol Time) (see the limited frequency table), and the process proceeds to step 1413.

  Next, FIG. 128 is an example of a limited frequency table in the ninth embodiment. This table is referred to when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol in a situation where the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is greater than 0. The main game table 3 is a result of whether the first main game symbol is wrong or not. The changing tendency of time (table contents) is different. Specifically, when referring to the main game table 3 in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the first main game symbol variation time is selected from three variation times of 10 seconds, 30 seconds, and 60 seconds. On the other hand, when the limited frequency table is referred to (when the time-reduced gaming state is ended by executing the symbol variation for the number of short times, the limited frequency counter MN52c is configured to set the predetermined frequency = 4. When the limited frequency table is referred to, the first main game symbol is selected so that only one type of variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Thus, the variation time of the first main game symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state is relatively shorter when referring to the limited frequency table than when referring to the main game table 3. In the ninth embodiment, the number of time reductions is one, and the symbol variation on the first main game side is executed in preference to the symbol variation on the second main game side. When entering the shortened game state, the basic game flow is that the first main game side loses 30 seconds and the symbol variation is executed once and the time-reduced game state ends. This is not the case if the main game symbol stops at the jackpot symbol). In addition, since the result of the lottery on the second main game side is about 1/1, it is a small hit, and it is configured so that a game ball can easily enter the V winning opening C27 during the small hit execution. “Change of main game symbol is executed ≒ Winning a small hit ≒ Winning a big hit triggered by a small hit”. Therefore, it is beneficial for the player to generate a hold on the second main game side in the time reduction game state, but at the end of the time reduction game state, the hold on the first main game side and the second main game side If there are both holdings, specifically, if there are 4 holds on the first main game side and 2 holds on the second main game side, there is a hold on the first main game side. If the four symbol variations for the four games are not completed, the symbol variation on the second main game side is not started. Therefore, the player does not wait for the end of the four symbol variations on the first main game side even though the player wants the symbol variation on the second main game side to be executed almost quickly. must not. For this reason, in the ninth embodiment, when one time of symbol variation in the time-reduced gaming state (symbol variation on the first main game side) is completed and the state is shifted to the non-time-reduced gaming state, the state is shifted to the limited frequency state ( The limited frequency counter MN52c is set to a predetermined number of times), and the variation time of the first main game symbol is set to a relatively short time (3 seconds in this example), thereby holding the first main game side on hold. It is configured so that the execution timing of the symbol variation on the second main game side comes early as it is digested at high speed. By comprising in this way, when the time reduction game state is complete | finished and the hold | maintenance of the 2nd main game side exists, the 2nd main game side symbol fluctuation can be performed earlier, The inside tempo can be improved and the player can be configured not to get bored. In addition, since it is configured to shift to the limited frequency state at the end of the time reduction gaming state for such a purpose, the predetermined number of times (initial value) set in the limited frequency counter MN52c is the upper limit number of holdings on the first main game side. (4) Even if the number of holdings on the first main game side is the upper limit at the end of the time-reduced gaming state, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation related to the holding on the first main game side should be short Is possible). As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the second main game side priority digestion may be used. In such a configuration, after the big hit ends, there are two holds on the first main game side, Even when there are two holds on the main game side, the hold on the second main game side is consumed first, so there is no need to provide a limited frequency state. In addition, in this case, after the big hit is triggered by the small hit on the second main game side, the time saving gaming state is surely shifted (the auxiliary game short flag is turned on). It is preferable to configure (for example, transition to a time-reduced gaming state, which is one time saving time). By configuring in this way, a state advantageous to the player progresses at a good tempo until the second main game side has no holding.

  Next, FIG. 129 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 4 in the ninth embodiment. The difference from the first modification from the third embodiment is Step 1554 (Ninth) and Step 1557 (Ninth). That is, if the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1552 that the condition device operation flag is on, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1554 (the ninth game) Turn off the auxiliary game short flag. Next, in step 1557 (ninth), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the limited frequency counter MN52c to zero, and proceeds to the processing in step 1558. With this configuration, when the count value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is greater than 0 (that is, when the gaming state shifts from the time-reduced gaming state to the non-time-reduced gaming state, the first main game symbol remains remaining. When the big hit is won, the limited frequency counter MN52c is cleared to zero so that the limited frequency state is not reached after the big hit ends.

  Next, FIG. 130 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 9 in the ninth embodiment. First, the difference from the first modification from the third embodiment is Step 1549 (9th). That is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time short flag in step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a predetermined value as the count value of the limited frequency counter MN52c in step 1549 (9th). “4” is set, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1550). As described above, at the timing when one time symbol variation, which is the number of time reductions, is completed and the time-reduced gaming state is completed, the upper limit number of the number of holdings on the first main game side is four times the counter of the limited frequency counter MN52c. It is configured to be set to a value.

  As described above, in the case where the ninth embodiment is configured for the second main game side priority digestion, in the time-reduced game state, when a plurality of holds on the second main game side occur, The hold on the first main game side is digested after the plurality of hold on the second main game side disappears. Specifically, when there are two holds on the first main game side and two holds on the second main game side, first, one hold on the second main game side is consumed and “ “Big Bonus with Small Bonus + Small Bonus”, then one second hold on the second main game side will be consumed, zero hold on the second main game side, After that, one remaining hold on the first main game side is consumed, the first main game symbol changes for 30 seconds, and the second main game side within 30 seconds It is a game of whether or not the suspension of the game can be caused (whether or not the auxiliary game can win the game). When configured in this way, “Aim for V!” Is displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the V prize opening C27 during the small hit on the second main game side. In such a case, the first main game symbol fluctuates because the second main game side holds 0 after the big hit, and the second main game side changes during the change of the first main game symbol. When a hold occurs, “Aim for V!” Is displayed 30 seconds after the end of the jackpot (after the first main game symbol changes), while the hold on the second main game side is 1 after the end of the jackpot. When the second main game symbol fluctuates due to occurrence of more than one, it can be configured to display “Aim for V!” Immediately after the big hit.

  Next, FIG. 131 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 (ninth) in FIG. 15 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 1699-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the executed special game is not a special game won in the time-saving game state. In the case of Yes in step 1699-1, in step 1699-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol that will shift to a time-saving jackpot symbol (time-saving game state after the jackpot is ended, in this example 4B, 5A, 5B, 7A, and 7B). If Yes in step 1699-2, the process proceeds to step 1699-4. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1699-2, in step 1699-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M, after the special game is triggered by the small hit (the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit) It is determined whether or not the special game has been executed. If Yes in step 1699-3, the flow advances to step 1699-4. Note that if the answer is No in step 1699-1, the process proceeds to step 1699-4. In this example, after the jackpot won in the time-saving gaming state, regardless of which jackpot symbol is, and regardless of which jackpot symbol triggered the jackpot The system is configured to shift to a time-saving gaming state after the big hit.

  Next, in step 1699-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, once) to the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1699-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1699-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1997). In the case of No in step 1699-3, in other words, even after the jackpot relating to “4A” won in the non-time-saving game state, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). By comprising in this way, the big hit concerning the 2nd main game side, that is, the big hit by the 2nd main game side big hit symbol being stopped, or the big hit triggered by the 2nd main game side small hit, After the completion of the game, the game will shift to a time-reduced game state, and as described above, the result of the lottery on the second main game side is configured to win almost a small hit, so the hold on the second main game side Is present, it is almost deterministic that it will be a big hit and will shift to the time-saving gaming state after the big hit ends (it will be easy to become a big hit and will easily shift to the time-saving gaming state after the big hit ends) ing. In other words, if the second main game side can be put on hold in the time-saving game state, the game is continued.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment, when the time-reduced gaming state is entered, the first main game symbol starts to change for 30 seconds, and the auxiliary game is played in that 30 seconds. When the side wins, the hold on the second main game side will occur, and the symbol variation on the second main game side that is executed after the time variation of one time has been completed and the time-saving game state has ended Since it is configured so that “winning at the small win → entering the V winning opening C27 → winning at the big win → shifting to the time-saving gaming state”, the first main game side of 30 seconds in the time-saving gaming state In the period in which the symbol variation is executed, it is possible to create a novel gameability such as whether or not the auxiliary game side can be elected and the second main game side can be put on hold.

(Modification 1 from the ninth embodiment)
In addition, in the first modification from the ninth embodiment, whether or not a hold on the second main game side can be caused during execution of one symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the time-saving game state. Although the playability has been described, it is possible to further create a novel playability different from the above-described playability. Therefore, unlike the ninth embodiment, the gameability of whether or not a hold on the second main game side can be caused during execution of one symbol change of the first main game symbol in the time-saving game state is achieved. The configuration is a first modification from the ninth embodiment, and only the changes from the ninth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 132 is a main game table 3 according to Modification 1 from the ninth embodiment. In the first modification from the ninth embodiment, the variation time in the time-reduced game state on the first main game side (at the time of losing) is different depending on the number of holds on the second main game side. Specifically, when the number of holds on the second main game side is 0 or 1, the variation time in the time shortened game state on the first main game side (when lost) is only one type of 30 seconds. On the other hand, if the number of holdings on the second main game side is 2 or 3, the variation time in the time reduction game state on the first main game side (when lost) is only one type of 40 seconds. Therefore, the variation time of the first main game symbol is relatively long when the number of holdings on the second main game side is large. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a more advantageous state for the player when a large number of holds on the second main game side can occur in the time-saving game state. In this example, the variation time of the first main game symbol is selected only for 30 seconds when the number of holdings on the second main game side is 0 to 1, and the number of holdings on the second main game side is 2 In the case of ~ 3, only 40 seconds are selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation time of the first main game symbol is 30 seconds regardless of the number of holdings on the second main game side. And 40 seconds can be selected, but when the number of holds on the second main game side is 2 to 3 than the case where the number of holds on the second main game side is 0 to 1, For example, 40 seconds may be easily selected as the variation time of one main game symbol (30 seconds may not be easily selected).

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the ninth embodiment, as in the ninth embodiment, the first main game symbol is executed once in the time-saving gaming state. It is configured to have a gameability of whether or not a hold on the second main game side can be caused, and when the hold number on the second main game side is large, the hold number on the second main game side is small The first main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state is being changed by configuring the variation time at the time of the loss of the first main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state to be relatively long. If a plurality of (for example, four) holds on the second main game side can be generated during the 30-second fluctuation), the time-reduced gaming state ends when the fluctuation of the first main game symbol ends. And symbol changes related to the hold on the second main game side By executing this, the time will be shortened if “winning for small win → game ball enters V winning opening C27 during small hit → winning for big win → shifting to time reduction game state again after big win” The variation time of the first main game symbol in the gaming state becomes a long time (40 seconds), and the possibility that the hold on the second main game side will occur increases. By configuring in this way, in the time-saving gaming state, if a plurality of (for example, four) holdings on the second main game side can occur, a highly interesting game in which the possibility that the villa will continue will increase. It is possible to create sex.

  In the ninth embodiment, a plurality of types of selection candidates for the variation time of the first main game symbol in the time-reduced game state may be provided. For example, any one of 10 seconds, 30 seconds, and 120 seconds may be provided. You may comprise so that a fluctuation | variation time may be selected. By configuring in this way, the probability that the hold on the second main game side can be caused differs depending on which of the fluctuation times of the first main game symbol executed in the time-saving game state is different. Gameability can be created.

  Further, in the first modification from the ninth embodiment, the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (the game ball entered the V winning opening C27 during the small hit execution and the big hit) Is executed, and the variation time (or variation time) of the first main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state depends on the type of the small-hit symbol that has been the trigger for the jackpot execution when transitioning to the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the jackpot The selection tendency, the average variation time) may be configured to be different. Specifically, when the big hit relating to “3A” which is the big hit symbol on the first main game side is executed, the big hit After the end of the jackpot, the game shifts to the limited frequency state A, and when the jackpot related to the first main game side jackpot symbol “7A” is executed, the system shifts to the limited frequency state B after the jackpot ends. The first main in The variation time of the technical symbol (or the average value of the variation time that can be selected) is 30 seconds, and the variation time of the first main game symbol (or the average value of the variation time that can be selected) in the limited frequency state B is 120 seconds. You may comprise so that it may become.

(Modification 2 from the ninth embodiment)
In addition, in 9th Embodiment, the game property of whether the holding | maintenance of the 2nd main game side could be caused during one time symbol change execution of the 1st main game symbol in the time reduction game state was demonstrated. However, it is possible to further create a novel gameability different from the above-described gameplay. Therefore, unlike the ninth embodiment, the gameability of whether or not a hold on the second main game side can be caused during execution of one symbol change of the first main game symbol in the time-saving game state is achieved. The configuration is a second modification from the ninth embodiment, and only the changes from the ninth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of Step 1200 in FIG. 4 in Modification 2 from the ninth embodiment. The change from the ninth embodiment is the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table on the right side of the figure, where the auxiliary game short flag A is on, the auxiliary game short flag B is on, and the auxiliary game The opening pattern of the second main game start opening electric component B11d when the auxiliary game side is won is different between the case where the time-short flag A is off and the auxiliary game time-short flag B is off ( These flags will be described later). More specifically, when the auxiliary game short flag A is off and the auxiliary game short flag B is off, the opening state of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is an opening state in which the game ball is difficult to enter ( For example, 0.2 seconds open → close). In addition, when the auxiliary game short flag A is on, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened when the stop symbol is “D1”: “1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second Open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed ”, and when the stop symbol is“ D2 ”,“ 0.2 second open → closed ”. The ratio at which the stop symbol is “D1” is 80/1024, and the rate at which the stop symbol is “D2” is 89/1024. That is, when the auxiliary game short flag A is on, even if the auxiliary game side is won, the stop symbol becomes “D2” at a rate of about half, and the second main game start port when the stop symbol is “D2” The opening mode of the electric accessory B11d is “0.2 second open → closed”, which is an open mode in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second main game start port B10. In addition, when the auxiliary game short flag B is on, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is opened when the stop symbol is “D1”: “3 seconds open → 1 second closed → 3 seconds If the stop symbol is “D2”, then “4 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed”. That is, when the auxiliary game side is won, regardless of the stop pattern, the opening mode of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is an open mode in which the game ball can easily enter the second main game start port B10. It has become. Thus, in the modified example 2 from the ninth embodiment, when the auxiliary game short flag B is on rather than when the auxiliary game short flag A is on, the auxiliary game side is won. It is configured such that the ease of entering a game ball into the second main game start opening B10 is increased. That is, even in the time-saving game state, the player's profit mode is different depending on which of the auxiliary game short flag A and the auxiliary game short flag B is on.

  Next, FIG. 134 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 (ninth modification 2) in FIG. 15 in Modification 2 from the ninth embodiment. First, in step 1670-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the finished special game is a special game won in the time-saving game state. In the case of Yes in step 1670-1, in step 1670-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is a short-time A big-hit symbol (a big-hit symbol in which the auxiliary game short-time flag A is turned on after the big-hit end, this example Then, it is determined whether it is 5A, 7A, or 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1670-2, in step 1670-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short flag A, and proceeds to the processing of step 1670-8.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1670-2, in step 1670-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates that the stop symbol is a short-time B big hit symbol (after the big hit, the auxiliary game short flag B is turned on, In this example, it is determined whether it is 4B or 5B). In the case of Yes in step 1670-4, the process proceeds to step 1670-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1670-4, in step 1670-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit. If Yes in step 1670-6, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997) without shifting to the time-reduced gaming state. If NO in step 1670-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short flag B in step 1670-7, and proceeds to step 1670-8.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1670-6, in step 1670-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short time flag B, and proceeds to the processing of step 1670-8. Next, in step 1670-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “1”, which is a predetermined number, to the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1670-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1997). As described above, when the game shifts to the time-reduced game state after the big hit, the main game short flag is turned on and the auxiliary game short flag A is turned on, and the main game short flag is turned on and the auxiliary game short flag B is turned on. Yes, there are a plurality of types of time-saving game states in which the opening mode of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is different when the auxiliary game side is elected. In addition, a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol that triggered the transition to the time reduction gaming state (a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit execution and the big hit is executed, and after the big hit, the time reduction gaming state Depending on the type of the small hit symbol that has been a big hit execution trigger in the case of shifting to (2), which of the auxiliary game short flag A and the auxiliary game short flag B is turned on can be different.

  By configuring as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example 2 from the ninth embodiment is an opportunity to shift to the time shortening gaming state when transitioning to the time shortening gaming state after the end of the big hit. Big-hit symbol or small-hit symbol (the small ball that triggered the big-hit when the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small-hit execution and the big-hit is executed, and the time-shifted game state is entered after the big-hit end) Depending on the type of the winning symbol), the main game short flag ON and the auxiliary game short flag A ON may be set, and the main game short flag ON and the auxiliary game short flag B ON may be set, and the auxiliary game short flag A ON. Is configured so that the player's profit mode is different between the case where the auxiliary game time short flag B is ON and the main game time short flag ON and the auxiliary game time short flag B If the auxiliary game side wins, it becomes deterministic (or easy to occur) that the second main game side holds, that is, the auxiliary game side can win On the other hand, when the main game short flag is on and the auxiliary game short flag A is on, even if the auxiliary game is elected, the second main game side The game is such that there is a case where the suspension occurs and the case where it is not generated, and two different games can be enjoyed in the time-saving game state.

(10th Embodiment)
In the fifth embodiment, it is configured to be able to execute a parallel lottery, and configured to be able to acquire a game ball by continuously winning a small hit in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, A gaming machine having such a gaming property is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration having a gameability that allows a player to obtain a ball by continuously generating small hit games different from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail as a tenth embodiment only with respect to differences from the fifth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a basic structure of the front side of the gaming machine in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, the first main game start port BA10- has a first main game start port AA10 at the lower center of the game area D30, and has an electric accessory on the right side from the center of the game area D30. 2 and two start ports corresponding to the first main game side. In addition, a specific area C22 is provided in the first grand prize opening C10, and a shielding member C28 that controls whether or not a game ball can enter the specific area C22 is movable by a solenoid (not shown). It is configured. In addition, the second main game start port B10 is not provided with an electric accessory. Note that the game balls that are left-handed and flow down the left side of the game area D30 are easy to enter the first main game start port AA10, and the first main game start port BA10-2 and the second main game start port B10. The game ball that is right-handed and flows down the right side of the game area D30 is difficult to enter the first main game start port AA10, and the first main game start port BA10- 2 and the second main game start opening B10 are configured to easily enter the ball.

  Next, FIG. 136 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 4 in the tenth embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1339-1 (tenth) and step 1339-2 (tenth), that is, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game start port AA 10 or If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first main game start opening BA10-2, in step 1339-1 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M is within the upper limit for the hold ball on the first main game side. It is determined whether it is (four balls in this example). If Yes in step 1339-1 (tenth), the process proceeds to step 1306. If No in step 1339-1 (tenth), the process proceeds to step 1312.

  Next, when the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1312 that a game ball has entered the second main game start opening B10, in step 1339-2 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M It is determined whether the reserved ball on the second main game side is within the upper limit (4 balls in this example). If Yes in step 1339-2 (tenth), the process proceeds to step 1316. If No in step 1339-2 (tenth), the process proceeds to the next process {step 1400 (tenth)}.

  Next, FIG. 137 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of Step 1400 (tenth) in FIG. 4 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 1400 (1) (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process to be described later. Next, in step 1400 (2) (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 138 is a flowchart relating to the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 137 in the tenth embodiment. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1409-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) variation start condition is satisfied. The change start condition is not during a special game (or during the operation of the condition device) and is not changing the first main game symbol (in the case of processing on the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbol is not changing). ) And there is a condition that the main game symbol is on hold and is not in the small hit game. That is, since the parallel lottery can be executed, when the process related to the first main game symbol is executed, there is no problem even if the second main game symbol fluctuates, but the first main game symbol is fluctuating. If there is, the variation start condition related to the first main game side is not satisfied.

  Next, in step 1409-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads the main game side random number. Next, in step 1409-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the read main game-side random number from the hold information and shifts (holds up) the remaining hold information. Next, in step 1409-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol winning lottery based on the main game side random number and the game state. Next, in step 1409-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines stop symbols related to the main game symbols based on the main game side random numbers and the result of lottery determination, and temporarily stores them in the RAM area. Next, in step 1409-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M is whether the main game probability change flag is on and the main game time short flag is off, in other words, the game state is a probability variation game state and a non-time shortened game state. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1409-6, in step 1409-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially the fluctuation The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the mode lottery random number (determined by referring to the table at the time of non-limited frequency in the main game table 3), temporarily stored in these RAM areas, and the process proceeds to Step 1409-9 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1409-6, in step 1409-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially , The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the variation mode random number) (determined by referring to the table at the limited frequency of the main game table 3), temporarily stored in these RAM areas, and the process proceeds to step 1409-9 To do.

  Next, in step 1409-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the information related to the determined main game symbol and the game state information (a command to the sub-control board S side, such as a symbol variation display start instruction command). ) Is set. Next, in step 1409-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the predetermined time related to the change time of the main game symbol based on the change mode as the first main game timer MP11t-C1 (second main game timer MP11t- Set to C2) to start the timer. Next, in step 1409-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the display unit B21g), the variable display of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is started. Next, in step 1409-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to step 1409-13. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1409-1, in step 1409-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1409-13, the process proceeds to step 1409-13.

  Next, in step 1409-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1409-13, in step 1409-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game symbol display part A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on the (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped, the display control is performed as the fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to Step 1409-19. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1409-13, in step 1409-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1409-15, in step 1409-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game symbol display part A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). (2nd main game symbol display section B21g) main game symbol variation display is stopped (forcibly stopped display) with the stop symbol as a losing symbol, and the display of the losing symbol as a fixed stop symbol is controlled. Control goes to step 1409-19. If NO in step 1409-15, in step 1409-17, CPUMC of main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1409-17, in step 1409-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game symbol display part A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The change display of the main game symbol on the (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is temporarily stopped, and the process proceeds to Step 1409-19. It should be noted that the symbol variation of the main game symbol paused in step 1409-18 is configured to resume the variation display when the small hits triggered by the suspension are completed, for example, a variation of 30 seconds. When the change of the first main game symbol of the time is paused 10 seconds after the start of the change, the display is changed for 20 seconds after the end of the small hit. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when one of the first main game symbols or the second main game symbol is changed in one main game symbol, the other main game symbol is a big hit. The main game symbol is forcibly stopped by losing. In addition, if the other main game symbol is a small hit while one main game symbol of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is changing, the change of the one main game symbol is suspended It is configured to

  Next, in step 1409-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information to the sub main control unit SM side that the symbol change is completed (symbol confirmation display instruction command). Is set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1409-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) changing flag. Next, in step 1409-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in Step 1409-21, in Step 1409-22, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to Step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1409-21, in step 1409-23, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1409-23, in step 1409-24, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1409-23, the process proceeds to step 1500 (fourth).

  Next, in step 1500 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the above-described specific game end determination process, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550). In addition, also when it is No in step 1409-13 or step 1409-17, it transfers to the following process (process of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 139 is an example of a main game table in the tenth embodiment. First, in the main game table 1, the second main game side is provided with a small hit, and the probability of winning the small hit is 1008/1024, and it is configured to win in almost one-tenth. Yes. In the main game table 2, two types of small hit symbols, “2BK” and “7BK”, are provided as the small hit symbols on the second main game side. Further, in the main game table 3 indicating the change time, the change time on the first main game side is the same table content as the table content referenced at the limited frequency and the non-limit frequency. The contents of the table to be referred to differ between the limited time and the non-limited frequency for the fluctuation time on the two main game side. The variation time of the second main game symbol is a long time at an unrestricted frequency (100 times or more of the longest variation time of the first main game symbol), and is short at a limited frequency. The time is the shortest time that can be selected (1 second in this example). Since the gaming state at the time of the limited frequency is a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state, the variation time of the second main game symbol is short only when it is a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state, In other game states, it is configured to be long. With this configuration, if the game is in the probability-variable game state and the non-time-reduced game state, the small hit on the second main game side is won with high probability, and the change time is short. (The total number of game balls to be paid out when the jackpot is not won / the total number of game balls to be fired) exceeds 1 (the number of game balls will increase even if the jackpot is not won).

Next, FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special winning opening opening pattern according to the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, the first main game side big hit (big hits related to 2A, 5A, and 7A) is “30 seconds open → closed” (full open) while the second round is open. The one-round opening mode of the big hit on the main game side (the big hit relating to 2B and 7B) is such that “0.4 second opening → 0.4 second closing” is repeated three times. In addition, the opening mode of one round per small hit (the small hit ends in one round) is “0.4 second open → 0.4 second closed” at the small hit related to “2BK”. “7 BK” is a small hit when “0.4 second open → 0.4 second closed” is repeated twice (depending on the type of the small hit symbol, the opening mode of the big winning opening C10 at the small hit is Configured to be different). With this configuration, one opening / closing of the big winning opening C10 at the time of big hit on the second main game side and one opening / closing of the big winning opening C10 at the time of the small hit (on the second main game side) are achieved. It opens and closes at the same and equally spaced intervals, making it difficult for the player to determine whether a big win or a small win is won. As described above, when the opening manner of the big prize opening C10 is different depending on the type of the small winning symbol, the shape of the big prize opening C10 may be the above-described slide type attacker. By configuring in this way, even when a small hit is executed in which the opening period of the big prize opening C10 is relatively short, a game ball can be entered into the big prize opening C10. In addition, both the big hit and the small hit will end the current round when ten game balls enter the big prize opening C10 during one round. At the time of game big hit (big hit related to 2B / 7B) and small hit (small hit related to 2BK / 7BK), the opening time of one big winning opening C10 is 0.4 seconds, so the game ball is big The open round of one round passes before 10 balls enter the winning opening C10, and the running round (small hit) ends. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the opening mode of the grand prize opening C10 in one round is rounded by entering a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls before the opening time ends. The opening mode of the special winning opening C10 may be designed so that the process ends. In addition, as a mode of opening the big winning opening C10 in a round with a big hit, an opening mode in which “0.4 second opening → 0.4 second closing” is repeated 50 times, and a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening C10. (For example, 10 balls) It may be configured so that the opening time of the grand prize opening C10 does not almost end before entering the ball. In such a configuration, the player is notified of the number of times that “0.4 second opening → 0.4 second closing” is executed before the first opening of the big prize opening C10 in the round starts. In addition, the number of “0.4 second opening → 0.4 second closing” to be notified may be a number that is not actually executed. Specifically, before the first opening of the grand prize winning opening C10 in the round starts, “10 times open!” Is notified, and then the timing before the end of the 10th opening (for example, 5 times opened). (Timing) may cause an effect such as “+10 times!” (Additional effect) to appear (actually, it is released 50 times, but the actual number of times until 10 balls enter the big prize opening C10). In addition, the number of times of opening and the effect of adding are generated in consideration of the actual round progress, the number of entered balls, etc.). In addition, after the end of three times, an ambiguous display that does not specify the number of times “extending!” May be executed. In addition, as a mode of opening the special winning opening C10, a round in which the above-described “0.4 second opening → 0.4 second closing” is repeated a plurality of times and a round in which the “30 second opening → closing” is always opened. For example, in the first R, “0.4 second open → 0.4 second closed” is repeated three times in the first R. After the 2nd R, a big hit is set to be an opening mode of “30 seconds open → closed”, or in the 4R, an “open mode of 0.4 seconds → closed 0.4 seconds” is repeated 3 times. In the round, a big hit may be provided so as to be an open mode of “30 seconds open → close”. Further, the release mode in the distribution game execution round may be configured to be different from the release mode in the normal round. For example, the distribution game execution round is configured only in the second round, and the jackpot related to “7B” is executed. In this case, the opening mode of the normal round is “0.4 second open → 0.4 second closed → 0.4 second open → closed”, whereas the second round which is the sorting game execution round. The opening mode may be configured as “0.4 second open → 0.4 second closed → 30 second open → closed”. In addition, in such a configuration, the number of game balls that enter the big winning opening C10 that triggers the end of the big hit round related to “7B” is 4 balls, such as 4 balls, and is released twice for 0.4 seconds. It is preferable that the number of game balls can be sufficiently entered. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 in the distributed game execution round, that is, it is possible to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player. . In addition, if the game balls are continuously fired toward the big prize opening C10, four balls can be easily entered into the big prize opening C10 which is the end of the sorting game execution round, and the actual big prize opening is achieved. Since the opening / closing mode of C10 is generally “0.4 second open → 0.4 second closed → 0.4 second open → closed”, the player sees whether the big hit is being executed or the small hit is being executed. It can be configured so that it is difficult to determine whether or not. Note that the gaming machine as in the tenth embodiment may have the following configuration. These may be combined as appropriate.
<If there is only one big prize exit>
(1) As a big hit on the second main game side, the number of execution rounds has at least a big hit of 16 rounds and a big hit of 2 rounds. (2) There is only one kind of small hit on the second main game side. (3) There is only one grand prize opening, and for the second round, the first round of the big prize opening is “0.1 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed”. The opening mode of the big winning opening is “1.5 seconds open → closed”, and the opening mode of the big winning opening at the time of a small hit is “0.1 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 1.5 seconds open”. (Only 1 round is executed), and in both the big hit of 2 rounds and the big hit of 16 rounds, the shielding member opens in the second round, but the shielding member does not open in the third round and thereafter.
<In the case of two big prize exits>
Applying the configuration of (1) and (2) described above, (A) having two big prize winning openings, that is, a distribution big prize opening having a specific area and a normal big prize opening not having a specific area In the second round of big hit, the opening mode of the first round of distribution prize winning opening is “0.1 second open → 0.2 second closing”, and the second round of distribution big winning opening is “1”. .5 seconds open → closed ”, and the mode of opening the large prize winning prize at the time of small hit is“ 0.1 second open → 0.2 second closed → 1.5 second open ”(only one round is executed) In both the 2nd round big hit and the 16th round big hit, the shielding member is opened in the second round, and in the third round and thereafter, the normal prize winning opening is opened. (B) In the case where the distribution prize opening is opened only in the second round and the normal prize opening is opened in the other rounds, the first round is the opening of the normal prize opening in the second round of big hits. The mode is “0.1 second open → closed”, and in the second round, the distribution large winning opening is opened “1.5 second open → closed”. The opening mode of the big winning prize at the time of small hit is “0.1 second open → 0.2 second closed → 1.5 second open” (only one round is executed). (C) In the case where the distribution prize opening is opened only in the second round and the normal prize opening is open in the other rounds, the first round is the opening of the normal prize opening in the second round of big hits. The mode is “0.1 second open → closed”, and in the second round, the distribution large winning opening is opened “1.5 second open → closed”. The opening mode of the big prize winning slot at the time of small hit is “1.5 seconds open” (only one round is executed). (D) In the case where the distribution prize opening is opened only in the first round and the normal prize opening is opened in the other rounds, the first round will be the distribution prize opening in the second round of big hits. The opening mode is “1.5 seconds open → closed”, and in the second round, the open mode of the normal big prize opening is “0.1 seconds open → closed”. The opening mode of the big winning prize at the time of small hit is “1.5 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.1 seconds open” (only one round is executed). (E) In the case where the distribution prize opening is opened only in the first round, and the normal prize opening is opened in the other rounds, the first round will be the distribution prize opening in the second round The opening mode is “1.5 seconds open → closed”, and in the second round, the open mode of the normal big prize opening is “0.1 seconds open → closed”. The opening mode of the large winning prize winning slot at the time of a small hit is “1.5 seconds open → closed” (only one round is executed).
You may comprise as mentioned above. In addition, in the case of one or two big winning mouths, in the big round of two rounds, the above-mentioned release of 1.5 seconds is replaced with 29 seconds, that is, the ease of entering a game ball into a specific area is increased. It may be opened for a long time to secure.

  Next, FIG. 141 is a flowchart according to the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of Step 1600 of FIG. 38 in the tenth embodiment. In the figure, differences from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail. The difference from the seventh embodiment is step 1620 (tenth), step 1624 (tenth), step 1628 (tenth) and step 1650 (tenth), that is, in step 1618, the main control board M After the CPUMC turns on the round continuation flag, in step 1620 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the special winning opening C10, starts the release timer MP54t, and proceeds to step 1622. In step 1622, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a game state information command related to the special game to the sub-side, in step 1624 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the big prize opening C10. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number of game balls have entered. In the case of Yes in step 1624 (tenth), in step 1628 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the special winning opening C10, and proceeds to step 1630. If the answer is No in step 1624 (tenth), the process proceeds to step 1626. Further, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command to the sub side in step 1638, in step 1650 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M, which will be described later, The game state determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997). Thus, in the tenth embodiment, there is only one prize winning opening C10 as the prize winning opening. In addition, the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment has a specific area C22 in the special winning opening C10 as in the seventh embodiment described above, and a game ball enters the specific area C22 during execution of the special game. When the ball is played, after the special game is over, the game moves to the probability variation game state. On the other hand, it is possible to enter the specific area C22 in the same way during the execution of the small hit game, but during the execution of the small hit game, the state does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the small hit game ( Details will be described later).

  Next, FIG. 142 is a flowchart relating to the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) in FIG. 141 in the tenth embodiment. In the figure, differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail. Differences from the second embodiment are step 1898 (tenth), step 1864 (tenth), step 1898-1 (tenth), step 1866 (tenth) and step 1870 (tenth), that is, If it is determined in step 1852 that the CPUMC of the main control board M has the distribution game execution flag OFF, in step 1898 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M receives a big prize in the distribution game execution round. The opening pattern of the mouth C10 is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1860. Further, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game execution flag in step 1862, in step 1864 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the set open pattern to receive a big prize opening. C10 is released and the release timer MP54t is started. Next, in step 1898-1 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the opening pattern A (in this example, 29000 ms opening → closing) as the opening pattern of the shielding member C28, and step 1866 (first). 10). Further, when the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1852 that the distribution game execution flag is on, or in step 1898-1 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M moves the shielding member C28. After setting the opening pattern, in step 1866 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a predetermined number (10 balls in this example) of games in which the round currently being executed at the special winning opening C10 is completed. It is determined whether or not a ball has entered. In the case of Yes in step 1866 (tenth), in step 1870 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the big prize opening C10. In the case of No in step 1866 (tenth), the process proceeds to step 1868, and in the case of Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1870 (tenth).

  Next, FIG. 143 is a flowchart according to the game state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 (tenth) in FIG. 141 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 1678-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1678-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1678-2, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1700 (sixth)}. If NO in step 1678-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag in step 1678-3. Next, in step 1678-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times (in this example, 50) as the time-count counter value, and performs the next processing {processing in step 1700 (sixth)}. Migrate to As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during execution of the special game, after the special game ends, the game moves to the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state. When a special ball is not entered into the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, the special game is configured to shift to the non-stochastic game state and the time-saving game state after the special game ends. In addition, in 10th Embodiment, it is comprised so that it may not transfer to a probability fluctuation | variation game state and a time shortening game state. In addition, since the shielding member C28 is configured to be opened during the small hit execution, the big hit on the second main game side and the small hit are performed in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state. It can be configured that it is difficult for the player to determine when it is being executed by visual recognition.

  Next, FIG. 144 is a flowchart relating to the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1700 (sixth) of FIG. 70 in the tenth embodiment. In the figure, differences from the sixth embodiment will be described in detail. The difference from the sixth embodiment is step 1729-1 (tenth), step 1729-2 (tenth), step 1747-1 (tenth), and step 1747-5 (tenth). After the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the opening time in the small hit game timer MP41t in step 1745-6, in step 1729-1 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the opening pattern of the shielding member C28. Is set to open pattern B (in this example, 52 ms open → close). Next, in step 1729-2 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the big prize opening C10, starts opening the shielding member C28, starts the small hit game timer MP41t, step 1745 Move to -7. In step 1745-7, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the small hitting start command (command to the sub control board S side), in step 1747-1 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls has entered the big winning opening C10. If Yes in step 1747-1 (tenth), the process proceeds to step 1747-4. If No, the process proceeds to step 1747-2. In step 1747-4, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a small hit end command (command to the sub control board S side), in step 1747-5 (tenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M Then, the special winning opening C10 is closed, and the process proceeds to Step 1747-6. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, there is only one big prize opening C10 as the big prize opening, and the same big prize opening C10 is opened at the time of both the big hit execution and the small hit execution. . Further, the special winning opening C10 is provided with a specific area C22 and a shielding member C28 for controlling whether or not a game ball enters the specific area C22, and the shielding member C28 is driven even when the small hit game is executed. It becomes. It should be noted that the opening mode of the shielding member C28 at the time of small hitting is opened by an opening pattern B (52 ms opening → closing) in which the opening time is relatively short, and the game ball is placed in the specific area C22 during the small hitting. Even if the player has entered the game, it is determined that the entry to the specific area C22 is invalid, and a new transition is made to the probability variation gaming state after the small hit game is completed (the transition from the non-stochastic variation gaming state to the probability variation gaming state It is configured so that there is no such thing.

  Next, FIG. 145 is an example of transition of the number of game balls in the tenth embodiment. First, in the period (a) in the figure, in the non-stochastic game state and the non-time-reduced game state, the game proceeds with a left strike. At the time of left-handed execution, the game is progressed by entering the first main game start opening AA10 at the lower center of the game board surface D30. Note that a winning ball (for example, three balls) is generated by entering the first main game start opening AA10. However, if the big hit is not won, the number of the game balls on hand gradually decreases. Next, in the period of (b) in the figure, a non-temporal and long open big hit (a big hit that causes the shielding member C28 to be long opened during the special game, which is a big hit on the first main game side, for example, “7A ) Is won. Note that the number of game balls on hand increases due to the jackpot related to “7A”.

  Next, during the period of (c) in the figure, the game state after the end of the special game becomes a probability-variable game state and a non-time-reduced game state by entering the specific area C22 in the special winning opening C10. When determining the variation time of the game symbol, a table of “limited frequency” is referred to. In the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, the game progresses by right-handed, and when right-handed, the second main game start opening B10 provided on the right side of the game board surface D30 is used. A game ball is entered and the game proceeds. In the time-reduced game state, a right-handed game is executed to enter a game ball into the first main game start port BA10-2 and the second main game start port B10, and the game proceeds (first game). The fluctuation time of 2 main game symbols is long). In addition, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol is an extremely short time (in this example, “1 second”). The base ball will exceed 1 and the number of balls will increase as a result of the game balls entering the first big prize opening C10. Thereafter, when the change of the main game symbol of 80 times is completed, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability changing state and a non-time shortening gaming state.

  Next, during the period shown in FIG. 4D, the variation time of the second main game start port B10 is long (in this example, 100 minutes to 500 minutes), and the game proceeds with left-handed strikes. It will be. In the game on the first main game side, since the small win is not won, if the big win is not won, the number of game balls on hand will gradually decrease. In the meantime, if the big win on the second main game side (for example, 2B) is won during the 80 symbol changes in the period (c) in the figure, the probability change game state and the non-time reduction are repeated again after the big hit. When the game state is entered, the probability variation counter MP51c is set to 80 times (because a game ball enters the specific area C22). In the tenth embodiment, the opening mode of the big winning opening C10 at the big win on the second main game side is similar to the opening mode of the big winning port C10 at the small hit, and it is difficult for the player to determine. Therefore, the player does not notice that the probability variation counter value has increased, and can realize a novel gameability such as not knowing how long the probability variation gaming state will continue.

  Next, FIG. 146 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. First, the difference from the fifth embodiment is Step 2550 (tenth). That is, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the special game related display control process in Step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the small hit game related display control process described later in Step 2550 (tenth). Is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2900.

  Next, FIG. 147 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 2400 of FIG. 146 in the tenth embodiment. First, the difference from the fifth embodiment is that step 2499-1 (tenth) to step 2499-4 (tenth) and step 2499-5 (tenth) to step 2499-7 (tenth). It is. That is, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the special gaming flag in step 2412, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the second big hit in step 2499-1 (tenth). It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (2B / 7B in this example) on the main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2499-1 (tenth), in step 2499-2 (tenth), a command related to the big hit start display for notifying that the big hit has been won is set, and then to step 2499-4 (tenth) Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2499-1 (10th) (when the big hit symbol being executed is a big hit on the second main game side, in this example, 2B / 7B), 2499-3 (10th) Therefore, the CPUSC of the sub control board S relates to the big hit start display that does not notify whether the big hit or the small win is won (the effect that it is difficult to determine whether the big hit or the small win is executed is executed). The command is set, and the flow proceeds to Step 2499-4 (tenth). If the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2402 that the special game execution flag is ON, the process proceeds to step 2499-4 (tenth).

  Next, in step 2499-4 (tenth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of winning prizes. Next, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2499-5 (tenth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S may be the big hit on the second main game side (in this example, 2B / 7B). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2499-5 (tenth), in step 2499-6 (tenth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to the jackpot end display for informing that the jackpot has ended. The process proceeds to 2430. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2499-5 (10th) (when the big hit symbol being executed is a big hit on the second main game side, in this example, 2B · 7B), step 2499-7 (10th) ), The CPUSC of the sub control board S does not notify whether the big hit or the small win is ended (the effect that it is difficult to determine whether the big hit or the small hit is executed is executed). Such a command is set, and the process proceeds to step 2430.

  Next, FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the small hit game related display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 2550 (tenth) in FIG. 146 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 2588-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the small hit gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2588-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hitting start command has been received from the main control board M side in step 2588-2. In the case of Yes in step 2588-2, in step 2588-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the small hit gaming flag. Next, in step 2588-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the big hit or the small hit has been won and does not indicate whether the big hit or the small hit has been won. A command relating to (a difficult performance is executed) is set, and the flow proceeds to Step 2588-5. Also in the case of No in step 2588-1, the process proceeds to step 2588-5.

  Next, in step 2588-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of winnings. Next, in step 2588-6, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hit end command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2588-6, in step 2588-7, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not notify whether the big hit or the small hit has ended (whether the big hit is won or the small hit is won) A command related to the effect that it is difficult to determine whether or not it has been performed is set. Next, in step 2588-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the small hit gaming flag and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2588-2 or 2588-6, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2900). The small hit start display set in step 2588-4 and the big hit start display set in step 2499-3 (tenth) in FIG. 7 and the jackpot end display set in step 2499-7 (tenth) in FIG. 147 have the same effect mode, so that the player is in the probability variation gaming state. In addition, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, it is configured so that it is not possible to determine whether the big hit or the small win is won (whether the big hit is being executed or the small hit is being executed) by visually checking the performance. Yes.

  Next, FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing an example of a temporary stop extension period of the decorative symbols on the first main game symbol side in the tenth embodiment. First, from the top in the figure, the period indicated by the first arrow is the temporary stop extension period of the decorative pattern on the first main game side (the period in which the temporary stop display that is not scheduled at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern is continued) The period indicated by the second arrow indicates the period during which the effect during the change of the decorative pattern on the first main game side is executed. The period indicated by the third arrow indicates the period from when the first main game symbol starts changing until the end of the change. The period indicated by the fourth arrow indicates that the second main game side changes. The period after the start and the end of the change is shown. The period indicated by the fifth arrow indicates the execution period of the small hit game. The lower arrow in the figure indicates the timing when the probability variation ends. Details will be described below in time series.

  First, in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, in a situation where the second main game symbol is fluctuating (fluctuating according to the small hit symbol), the variation of the first main game symbol is terminated. Transition to the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state (the timing at which the probability variation ends is set to 0 seconds). After that, the game is advanced by left-handed, and the symbol variation determined at the variation time of 60 seconds of the first main game symbol is started. In addition, an effect executed during the change of the first main game symbol and an effect during the change of the decorative symbol related to the first main game side are also started to be executed (effect of 60 seconds). After that, at the timing 2 seconds after the timing when the probability variation gaming state ends, the second main gaming symbol that has been changed stops at the small winning symbol, so that the small winning game is started. In the tenth embodiment, when the small hit symbol on the second main game side is stopped, the variation of the first main game symbol is temporarily stopped until the small hit game related to the small hit symbol ends. Therefore, the symbol variation on the first main game side that has been fluctuating is temporarily stopped. Even if the change of the first main game symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect executed during the change of the first main game symbol and the effect during the change of the decorative symbol related to the first main game side are continuously executed. . In the tenth embodiment, when the small hit symbol on the second main game side is stopped, the symbol variation of the first main game symbol that is changing is changed until the small hit game related to the small hit symbol ends. Although it is configured to pause, the first main game that was changing during execution of the small hit game executed by stopping the small hit symbol on the second main game side is not limited to this. The symbol variation of the symbol may be extended, that is, the variation time of the first main game symbol may be extended for the execution period of the small hit game on the second main game side.

  After that, 60 seconds have passed since the probability variation gaming state is over, and the effect executed during the variation of the first main game symbol and the effect during variation of the decorative symbol related to the first main game side will be terminated. However, since the variation end timing of the first main game symbol is extended by the pause period due to the small hit on the second main game side, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol on the first main game side is extended. The Rukoto. In addition, since the timing 60 seconds after the probability varying gaming state ends is the decoration symbol confirmation stop timing, the decoration symbol is a timing earlier than the timing (for example, a timing 2 seconds before). Is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, at the timing 70 seconds after the probability variation gaming state ends, the variation of the first main game symbol ends because the extended period due to execution of the small hit on the second main game side has elapsed. The temporary stop extension period of the decorative symbol on the main game side will also be terminated (the decorative symbol on the first main game side will be confirmed and stopped).

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit on the second main game side is executed in a situation where the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is being executed, For this reason, the first main game symbol is temporarily suspended and the first main game symbol variation stop timing is extended. In addition, even when the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is paused, the effect executed during the variation of the first main game symbol and the effect during the variation of the decorative symbol related to the first main game side are as planned. Since it is executed, the end timing of the effect is the timing before the change stop timing of the first main game symbol. In such a situation, the tenth embodiment is configured to extend the temporary stop display period of the decorative symbol related to the first main game symbol to the stop timing of the first main game symbol.

  In the tenth embodiment, when the transition from the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state to the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state remains, Since the game is consumed in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, the variation time of the symbol variation relating to the hold on the second main game side is long (for example, 100 minutes). After that, it becomes the timing when the symbol variation related to the remaining hold on the second main game side ends, and in this timing, when the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, The game is progressing by changing the game symbol, and the effect executed during the change of the first main game symbol and the effect during the change of the decorative symbol related to the first main game side are displayed on the effect display device SG. Will be. Even in such a situation, by adopting a configuration in which the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol related to the first main game symbol as described above is extended, the player can stop the second main game symbol (to the small hit symbol). The game can be progressed without causing any doubt to the player. The shortest variation time of the second main game symbol in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state is the longest variation time of the first main game symbol in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state. Has also been a long time.

  By configuring as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment is configured to be in the limited frequency state in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the second main game in the limited frequency state. By configuring the second main game side to win almost every small change, the symbol variation time will be short, and in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, As a result of winning the game, the game was created with an increasing number of game balls. In addition, when a transition is made to the probability variation gaming state, a predetermined number of times (80 in this example) is given a certain number of times of probability variation, and in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, the big hit and small on the second main game side By visually resembling the appearance of the big winning opening with the win, the player will proceed with the game without noticing that the predetermined number of chances of change has been granted again by winning the big win, The game can be progressed with the expectation that the probability variation gaming state, that is, the game state advantageous to the player will not be known for a long time.

(Modification 1 from 10th Embodiment)
In the tenth embodiment, a parallel lottery can be executed, and a game ball can be obtained by continuously winning a small hit in a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state. Although there is only one winning opening, such a game can be realized with a configuration having two large winning openings. Therefore, a configuration having two big winning openings and a configuration having a gameability capable of obtaining a game by continuously generating a small hit game are different from the tenth embodiment as a modified example 1 from the tenth embodiment. Only the point will be described in detail.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating a basic structure of the front side of the gaming machine in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, only one first grand prize opening C10 is provided as a big prize opening. However, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the first big prize opening is located at the center lower part of the game area D30. C10 is provided, and a second big prize opening C20 is provided in the lower right part of the game area. The first grand prize opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape which is the same shape as the big prize opening in the tenth embodiment, while the second big prize opening C20 is the first main game start opening BA10-. The shape is the same as that of No. 2, that is, a shape in which an electric accessory is attached to the main game start opening, and at first glance, it is difficult to distinguish from a big prize opening.

  In addition, when it is set as a board | plate surface structure like the example 1 of a change from 10th Embodiment, either of the 1st grand prize opening C10 and the 2nd big prize opening C20 in the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state You may comprise so that can open | release. Specifically, as in the tenth embodiment, “3BK” and “7BK” are provided as the small winning symbols on the second main game side (for example, the stop ratio of the stopped symbols when winning the small winning is “3BK”). : 7BK = 2: 1)), when winning the small win related to “3BK”, the first big prize opening C10 is opened, and when winning the small hit related to “7BK” May be configured such that the second grand prize opening C20 is opened. With this configuration, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment in which the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state do not exist, in the case of the probability variation gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state, the player Despite recognizing that it is in a highly profitable state, it feels uncomfortable that the main game starting port provided with the electric accessory does not open (game machines installed in the market When the situation becomes highly profitable for the player, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation (because it is a probability-variable gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, and the electric utility is frequently released). In addition, when winning a small hit relating to “7BK”, which is a small hit that the second big winning opening C20 opens, it is configured so as not to notify the player that the winning is a small hit. It can be shown as if the big prize opening C20 is a start opening provided with an electric accessory.

  Further, when configured as in the tenth embodiment or the modified example 1 from the tenth embodiment, in the non-time-saving game state, the first main game symbol is stopped and the second main game symbol When the game is changing, the standby demonstration screen (moving image mainly displayed when the game is not progressing, for example, the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are both stopped. It may be configured so that it can be displayed when the current status is maintained for 30 seconds and may be referred to as a start demonstration screen, or it may be configured to adjust the volume / light quantity of the gaming machine or the menu screen (operating the sub input button) It is possible to change the various settings such as volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, etc. that can be displayed by doing this, and may be configured to display a customization screen, a setting screen, etc. In other words, when the first main game symbol is stopped and the second main game symbol is changing, the game may be handled in the same manner as the situation where the game is not progressing. In such a configuration, when the first main game symbol is changing, it is impossible to display the standby demonstration screen, adjust the volume / light quantity of the gaming machine, and display the menu screen. Is preferred.

(Eleventh embodiment)
In the second embodiment, a configuration in which a game ball enters the specific area C22 during execution of a special game, so that a transition to the probability-variable game state is made after the special game is completed (so-called a ball game machine). However, in the configuration of the second embodiment, a configuration capable of taking countermeasures against illegal games will be described in detail as an eleventh embodiment with respect to differences from the second embodiment.

  First, FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating a basic structure on the front side of a gaming machine in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the auxiliary game start port H10, the second main game start from the top along the flow path on the right side from the center of the game area D30, where the game ball will flow down when the player hits right. The mouth B10, the general winning opening P10, the first winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20 are arranged in this order. Here, the general winning opening P10 is provided on the upper right side of the first major winning opening C10, and the game ball that has passed in the vicinity of the second main gaming starting opening B10 is the general winning opening P10 or the large winning opening (first winning opening). It is configured to flow down to one of the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20). That is, when any of the big winning openings is open, the game ball that has passed near the second main game starting opening B10 is the general winning opening P10 or the big winning opening (the first big winning opening C10 or the first winning opening). It is configured to enter any of the two major winning openings C20). With this configuration, during the special game, in addition to the game balls that can be acquired by entering the game balls into the first grand prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20, the ball entering the general prize opening P10. The number of award balls can be increased and the number of game balls that can be acquired by executing a special game once can be increased. Also, the first grand prize opening C10 has a specific area C12 inside, and, like the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C12 during execution of the special game, After the special game is over, the game machine is configured to shift to a probability-variable game state (so-called a ball game machine). The first big prize opening C10 is configured to be moved by a first big prize opening solenoid C13, and the shielding member C28 that controls whether or not a specific area C12 is entered is moved by the shielding member solenoid C14. It is comprised so that. The general winning opening P10 is provided with a ball adjusting member Y10 for adjusting the ease of entering a game ball into the general winning opening P10, and the general winning opening P10 is connected to the general winning opening P10. A maintenance nail N10 that adjusts the ease of entering the game ball of the game ball is provided. By adjusting the ball adjustment member Y10 and the maintenance nail N10 at the time of game machine design, the game ball to the general prize opening P10 is adjusted. It is configured so that the ease of entering can be adjusted. Details will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 152 is a board image diagram around the general winning opening on the front side of the gaming machine in the eleventh embodiment. First, the general winning opening P10 is provided with a ball adjusting member Y10 that is a member for adjusting the ease of entering a game ball into the general winning opening P10. A maintenance nail N10 for adjusting the ease of entering a game ball into the general winning opening P10 is provided above the general winning opening P10. In the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to adjust the ease of entering a game ball into the general winning opening P10 by adjusting the ball adjustment member Y10 and the maintenance nail N10 when designing the gaming machine. Has been. As described above, as a configuration for adjusting the pitch to the general winning opening P10 at the time of designing the gaming machine, for example, when an accessory such as the winning adjustment member Y10 is attached, the gaming ball to the general winning slot P10 is used. Although it is possible to adjust the ease of entering the ball so that it is difficult to enter, the shape of the entrance adjusting member Y10 is constant, so that the ease of entering the ball cannot be finely adjusted. Therefore, by providing one maintenance nail N10 in the vicinity of the general winning opening P10 and finely adjusting the ease of entering the game ball into the general winning opening P10 with the maintenance nail N10, the intended general winning opening The gaming machine can be shipped to the amusement hall with the ease of entering P10.

  Next, FIG. 153 is an example of a magnetic sensor arrangement front view in the eleventh embodiment. As shown on the left side of the figure, the magnetic sensor J10 has a game ball YG10 that flows above the first major winning opening C10 and the general winning opening P10 in the gaming area D30 and flows down to the right from the center of the gaming area D30. It is arranged in the middle of the flow path that leads to the big winning opening C10 and the general winning opening P10. Further, the magnetic sensor J10 is not visible from the front, and is provided on the back side (viewed from the player) of the game board surface. Since the magnetic sensor J10 is provided at such a position, as shown on the right side of the figure, a player having an injustice intends to place a magnet M10 on the glass door D18 adjacent to the flow path of the game ball YG10. Even if a plurality of game balls YG10 are sucked (retained on the flow path) and a large number of game balls YG10 are made to enter the first big prize opening C10 or the general prize opening P10 at once, the magnetic sensor By bringing the magnet M10 closer to J10, the magnetic sensor J10 detects the magnetism generated by the magnet M10, and transmits an error signal (incorrect detection signal) to the main control board M side. Although not shown, when the main control board M receives an error signal (incorrect detection signal) from the magnetic sensor J10, the main control board M sends a command based on the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality error to the sub-control board S side. Transmitting and transmitting a signal (external terminal signal) based on the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality error to the outside of the gaming machine.

  Next, FIG. 154 is an image diagram of the arrangement side surface of the magnetic sensor in the eleventh embodiment. Since the magnetic sensor J10 is inserted into a cylindrical cavity on the back side of the game board surface, it cannot be visually recognized from the front surface, and the design applied to the front side of the game board surface is not impaired. It is possible to prevent a decline in the aesthetic appearance. In addition, when the game progresses normally, the magnetic sensor J10 and the magnetic abnormality error are unnecessary. Therefore, when the magnetic sensor is installed on the front side of the game board surface, the player intends to install the magnetic sensor J10. However, it is possible to prevent such a situation by disposing the magnetic sensor J10 on the back side of the game board. . An example of such a magnetic sensor J10 is a magnetic sensor using a reed switch. A reed switch has a configuration in which two linear ferromagnetic lead pieces are opposed to each other with a certain contact interval, and when a magnetic field is applied from the outside in the axial direction of the lead piece. The lead piece is magnetized, the free ends of the opposed lead pieces approach each other, and a signal can be transmitted when the lead piece is energized by contact. In particular, as shown in this example, when the longitudinal direction of the reed switch is arranged perpendicular to the game board surface, the N pole or S pole of the magnet M10 can be detected with high sensitivity. The configuration of the magnetic sensor J10 is not limited to this, and a magnetic sensor using a magnetically sensitive semiconductor element such as a Hall element, MR (magnetoresistive) element, or MI (magnetic impedance) element can be used. is there. A fraud detection signal transmitted from the magnetic sensor J10 upon detection of the magnet M10 is input to the main control board M. The configuration for detecting the shape and magnetism of the magnetic sensor is not limited to that of the eleventh embodiment, and there is no problem if it is changed as long as unauthorized magnetism can be detected appropriately. For example, a magnetic sensor having a short box shape (rectangular shape) and strong magnetic detection sensitivity in a direction perpendicular to the front end surface and the rear end surface may be used. When such a magnetic sensor is used, (1) a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided on the game board surface D30, and the front surface of each magnetic sensor faces the front side of the game board surface D30 (as viewed from the player). The rear end surface may be arranged so as to face the back side (viewed from the player) of the game board surface D30. By arranging in this way, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the first grand prize win in the first detection region, which is a region where magnetism can be detected on the tip side of the magnetic sensor. It is possible to detect illegal magnetism generated in the vicinity of the mouth C10, the second big prize opening C20, the general winning opening P10, the auxiliary game start opening H10, etc., and the magnetism can be detected at the rear end side of the magnetic sensor. In the second detection area, which is a large area, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the first major winning port C10, the second major winning port C20, the general winning port P10, the auxiliary gaming starting port Unauthorized magnetism generated in the vicinity of H10, etc. cannot be detected. (2) The magnetic sensor is such that the front end surface faces the right side (viewed from the player) of the game board surface D30 and the rear end surface faces the left side (viewed from the player) of the game board surface D30, or the front end surface faces the game board surface. You may arrange | position so that it may face to the left side (viewing from a player) of D30, and a rear end surface may face the right side (viewing from a player) of game board surface D30. By arranging in this way, a first detection region which is a region where magnetism can be detected on the front end side of the magnetic sensor, and a second detection region which is a region where magnetism can be detected on the rear end side of the magnetic sensor, In at least one of the areas, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the first major winning port C10, the second major winning port C20, the general winning port P10, and the auxiliary gaming starting port H10. It is possible to detect illegal magnetism generated in the vicinity of.

  In the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment, as described above, the first big prize opening C10 and the shielding member C28 in the specific area C12 are respectively formed by the first big prize opening solenoid C13 and the shielding member solenoid C14. It is configured to move. As for the mechanism by which the solenoid moves the member, for example, a solenoid (electric drive means) for controlling the operation of opening or closing the big prize opening provided on the front surface of the game board is arranged on the back side of the game board. Then, a door opening / closing shaft extending from the opening / closing door of the prize winning opening and a plunger movable within a predetermined range by energization of the solenoid are connected via an arm member or the like, and an electric driving force generated by the solenoid is connected to the arm. The door can be opened and closed by transmitting it to the door opening / closing shaft via a member or the like. Then, the solenoid is energized under a predetermined hit condition, and the open / close door of the large winning opening in the closed state can be opened.

  Further, in the first grand prize opening C10, an obstructable (for example, obstructable by sliding) shielding for allocating whether or not the game ball that entered the first grand prize opening C10 is in the specific area C12. A member C28 is provided in the first grand prize opening. The sliding displacement of the shielding member C28 is performed in response to an electric driving force generated by the shielding member solenoid C14 in the same manner as the opening / closing operation of the first big prize opening C10 described above. The solenoid having such a mechanism is configured such that a magnetic field (magnetic field) is generated in the periphery by energization of the solenoid in accordance with the generation of the electric driving force.

  Next, FIG. 155 is an operation diagram according to the monitoring period of the magnetic sensor in the eleventh embodiment. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the first big prize opening C10 is moved by energizing the first big prize opening solenoid C13 and the shielding member C28 in the specific area C22 is energized to the shielding member solenoid C14. It is configured as follows. Therefore, as described with reference to FIG. 153, when the magnetic sensor J10 is installed in the vicinity of the first big prize opening C10 in order to prevent fraud, the first big prize opening C10 and the shielding member C28 are operated. In the meantime, the first big prize opening C10 using the first big prize opening solenoid C13 is opened and closed (more specifically, it is opened by energization and closed by stopping energization), and the shielding member solenoid C14 is turned on. The magnetic sensor J10 described above is generated by energizing the solenoid in response to the driving of the used shielding member C28 (more specifically, energization can be performed by energization, and the entrainment is inhibited by the deenergization). The magnetism will be detected and an error signal (injustice detection signal) will be transmitted.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine having a drive mechanism using a solenoid, a configuration for monitoring fraud is specifically described below. In the eleventh embodiment, the sorting game execution round is the fourth round. First, in the upper part of the figure, a specific time schedule of the fourth round, that is, the opening period, closing period, and preparation period of the first grand prize opening before and after the distribution game execution round is shown. On the lower side of the figure, the opening / closing patterns of the first big prize opening C10 and the shielding member C28 before and after the distribution game execution round, the monitoring invalid period, and the magnetic sensor monitoring status are shown. Here, the “monitoring invalid period” is a period from the timing when the first big prize opening solenoid C13 or the shielding member solenoid C14 is turned off to the time when 1024 ms elapses. In consideration of the detection by the magnetic sensor J10, this is a period in which monitoring is disabled. On the other hand, the “magnetic sensor monitoring status” illustrates whether the magnetic sensor J10 enables or disables monitoring for execution including the monitoring invalid period.

  First, in the upper time schedule in the upper part of the figure, the first grand prize opening C10 of the third round (one round before the distribution game execution round) and the fourth round (the distribution game execution round) is opened. The period is 28000 ms, the closing period of the third round and the closing period of the fourth round are 3200 ms, with a further preparation period of 60 ms after the closing period. Next, a description will be given in chronological order from the left in FIG. First, in the situation in which the third round (the previous round of the distribution game execution round) is being executed, at the timing shown in FIG. When the winning opening C10 is closed (the shielding member C28 is not opened in the third round), the monitoring invalid period is started (continues for 1024 ms). Next, at the timing of FIG. 2, since 1024 ms has elapsed since the start of the monitoring invalid period, the monitoring invalid period ends, and both the first big prize opening solenoid C13 and the shielding member solenoid C14 are off, so that the magnetic Monitoring of the sensor J10 is effective. Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 3, the fourth round (distribution game execution round) is started, and the first big prize opening solenoid C13 or the shielding member solenoid C14 is turned on, and the first big prize opening C10 and the shielding member are turned on. C28 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern, and monitoring of the magnetic sensor J10 is invalidated. Next, at the timing of FIG. 4, since the opening period of the first big prize opening C10 in the fourth round has ended, the first big prize opening solenoid C13 and the shielding member solenoid C14 are turned from on to off, and the first big prize winning is achieved. The mouth C10 and the shielding member C28 are closed, and the monitoring invalid period is started again. Next, at the timing of FIG. 5, since 1024 ms has elapsed since the start of the monitoring invalid period, both the first big prize opening solenoid C13 and the shielding member solenoid C14 are off, so the monitoring of the magnetic sensor J10 is effective. It becomes. Next, at the timing of FIG. 6, the fifth round is started, the first big prize opening solenoid C13 is turned on, and the first big prize opening C10 is opened, so that the monitoring of the magnetic sensor J10 becomes invalid.

  On the other hand, for the lower part of the figure, first, in the upper time schedule, the opening period of the first big winning opening C10 in the seventh round and the eighth round (both are not distribution game execution rounds) is 28000 ms. The closing period of the seventh round and the closing period of the eighth round are 700 ms, and a further preparation period of 60 ms is provided after the closing period. Next, a description will be given in chronological order from the lower left of the figure. First, in a situation where the seventh round is being executed, at the timing shown in FIG. 5A, the first grand prize opening solenoid C13 is turned off from the on state, the first big prize opening C10 is closed, and the monitoring invalid period is set. Started (continues for 1024 ms). Next, at the timing of FIG. 8B, the eighth round is started, the first big prize opening solenoid C13 is turned on from OFF, and the first big prize opening C10 is opened. At this time, the monitor invalid period 1024 ms has not ended, and thereafter, the monitor invalid period ends because 1024 ms has elapsed since the start of the monitor invalid period at the timing of FIG. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6C, since the first big prize opening solenoid C13 is kept on, the monitoring of the magnetic sensor J10 remains invalid.

  Next, since the opening period of the first big prize opening C10 in the eighth round is completed at the timing d in the figure, the first big prize opening solenoid C13 is turned off from on, and the first big prize opening C10 is closed. Then, the monitoring invalid period is started again. Next, the ninth round is started at the timing e in the figure, the first big prize opening solenoid C13 is turned on from OFF, and the first big prize opening C10 is opened. At this time, the monitor invalid period 1024 ms has not ended, and thereafter, the monitor invalid period ends because 1024 ms has elapsed since the start of the monitor invalid period at the timing shown in FIG. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the monitoring of the magnetic sensor J10 remains invalid because the first big prize opening solenoid C13 is kept on. In the seventh to ninth rounds, the shielding member C28 is not movable (in the eleventh embodiment, the sorting game execution round is only the fourth round), so the shielding member solenoid C14 is off. It remains. That is, the monitoring of the magnetic sensor J10 is always invalid during the seventh to ninth rounds.

  As described above, in the sorting game execution round (the round in which the shielding member C28 is driven) and the previous round, the closing period is 3200 ms, and in the other rounds, the closing period is 700 ms. In other words, the sorting game execution round (the round in which the shielding member is driven) and the closing period in the previous round are configured to be shorter than the closing periods in the other rounds. Further, the monitoring invalid period for not detecting the residual magnetism of the solenoid is 1024 ms, and the length of the period is “the closed period in the distribution game execution round and the previous round> the monitoring invalid period> the closing period in the other rounds” In the closing period before and after the sorting game execution round (the closing period of the sorting game execution round, the closing period of the previous round of the sorting game execution round), While the winning opening solenoid C13 is off, the shielding member solenoid C14 is off, and there is a period that is not the monitoring invalid period, in the closing period other than the closing period before and after the distribution game execution round, the first big winning opening solenoid C13 Off, and the shield member solenoid C14 is off, and it is not the monitoring invalid period, and it is configured not to have a period. Can. With this configuration, the shielding member C28 is opened, and a distribution game execution round in which a game ball can enter the specific area C22, that is, whether or not to shift to the probability-variable game state after the special game ends. In the round that greatly affects the profits of the player, when the game ball is illegally entered into the specific area C12 using the magnet M10, the fraud can be detected. In rounds other than the rounds before and after the distribution game execution round, since the influence on the player's profit is small without monitoring the magnetic sensor J10, the closing period is set to be short (700 ms in this example). The progress speed of the special game can be increased, and the game can be progressed with a good tempo. In the same round, when the first grand prize opening C10 has an opening pattern that opens and closes several times, when the monitoring invalid period of 1024 ms has elapsed after opening → closing, the first big prize opening C10 Even in the closed state, the monitoring of the magnetic sensor J10 may be effective. The magnetic sensor J10 installed in the vicinity of the first grand prize opening C10 is provided with the monitoring invalid period as described above. However, the magnetic sensor (10) installed in a position not in the vicinity of the other first big prize opening C10 ( For the magnetic sensor farther away from the first grand prize opening C10 than the magnetic sensor J10 installed in the vicinity of the first big prize opening C10, the magnetism by the first big prize opening solenoid C13 and the shielding member solenoid C14 is not detected. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a monitoring invalid period, and it may be configured to always monitor. That is, management different from the magnetic sensor (in this example, the magnetic sensor J10) installed in the vicinity of the first grand prize opening C10 may be executed. Of the closing periods before and after the assigned game execution round, only one of the closing periods may be longer than the closed periods other than the closed periods before and after the assigned game execution round. . In addition, a single winning opening may be configured to open and close multiple times, and in such a case, a predetermined period (for example, 1024 ms) immediately after closing of the large winning opening in the round. Is a monitoring invalid period, and after the monitoring invalid period ends, the monitoring valid period may be set even if the big prize opening is closed.

  Next, FIG. 156 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the eleventh embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the eleventh embodiment, the vibration sensor J10 is connected to the main control board M. As described above, when the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, an error signal is sent to the main control board M. Is configured to transmit.

  Next, FIG. 157 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M according to the eleventh embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is about step 1350 (11th) and an example of a payout ball number table shown in the center of the figure. First, in step 1300, after the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process, in step 1350 (11th), the CPUMC of the main control board M detects a general winning opening entrance detection described later. The process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1400. An example of the number of payout prize balls indicates the number of payout prize balls corresponding to each winning opening. More specifically, the number of payout prize balls when entering the first main game start opening A10 is “4”, and the number of payout prize balls when entering the second main game start opening B10 is “1”. The number of payout balls when entering the first grand prize port C10 or the second grand prize port C20 is “13”, and the number of payout balls when entering the general prize port P10 is “3”. As described above, when the player enters the second main game start opening B10 (the main game start opening equipped with the electric accessory), “1” as the number of prize balls paid out enters the first main game start opening A10. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out is less than “4”. In addition, when the player enters the second main game start opening B10 (the main game start opening provided with the electric accessory), “1” as the number of prize balls paid out is the prize ball when the player enters the general winning opening P10. It is less than the number of payouts “3”. The prize ball payout number “3” when entering the first main game start port A10 is smaller than the prize ball payout number “4” when entering the first main game start port A10. . However, the aspect of the number of prize balls to be paid out is not limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the general prize opening P10 is the first main game start opening A10 or the second main game start opening B10. You may comprise so that it may become more than the number of prize ball payouts at the time of entering. Further, the number of payout prize balls when entering the first main game start opening A10 may be “3” which is the same as the number of payout prize balls when entering the general prize opening P10.

  Next, FIG. 158 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of Step 1200 in FIG. 4 in the eleventh embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table on the right side of FIG. That is, in both the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, the opening mode of the second main game start-up electric accessory B11d, which is said to be maritime when the auxiliary game side is won, It is configured to open. Specifically, in the non-time-reduced game state, when the stopped auxiliary game symbol is “D1”, it is “0.1 second open → 0.1 closed → 0.1 second open → closed”, When the stopped auxiliary game symbol is “D2”, “0.2 second open → 0.1 second closed → 0.2 second open → closed”. Also, in the time-reduced game state, when the stopped auxiliary game symbol is “D1”, “1 second open → 1 closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed” and stopped. When the auxiliary game symbol is “D2”, “0.2 second open → 0.8 second closed → 4 second open → closed”.

  Next, FIG. 159 is a flowchart of a general winning opening entrance ball detection process according to the subroutine of Step 1350 (11th) of FIG. 157 in the eleventh embodiment. First, in step 1352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening P10. In the case of Yes in step 1352, in step 1354, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a general winning opening entry command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). By configuring in this way, it is possible to transmit that a game ball has entered the sub-control board S side every time a game ball enters the general winning opening P10.

  Next, FIG. 160 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the eleventh embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2950 (11th) of the sub-main side routine. In step 2400, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the special game related display control process, step 2950 (the 11th) is executed. 11), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes an effect display control process at the time of entering the ball, which will be described later, and proceeds to Step 2900.

  Next, FIG. 161 is a flowchart of the effect display control process at the time of entry according to the subroutine of Step 2950 (11th) in FIG. 160 in the eleventh embodiment. First, in step 2952, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the current gaming state received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 2954, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a general winning opening entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2954, in step 2956, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2956, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2900). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2956, in step 2958, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game is currently being executed. The gaming state during execution of the special game is a non-stochastic game state and a non-time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2958, in step 2960, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes an effect congratulating that the game ball has been acquired (for example, an effect of executing display of “bonus winning GET !!”). A command is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900). If NO in step 2958, in step 2962, the CPUSC of the sub control board S issues a command for executing an effect for urging left-handed (for example, an effect for executing a display of “Return to left-handed”). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900). In addition, also when it is No in step 2954, it transfers to the next process (process of step 2900).

  By configuring in this way, in the time-saving game state, the game progresses by right-handed, and if the right-handed is executed, the game ball enters the general winning opening P10 in normal game progress. Since it frequently occurs, an effect that prompts the user to stop right-handed and execute left-handed (for example, an effect that displays “Return to left-handed”) is not executed. In addition, since the special game is not being executed, an effect that congratulates that the game ball has been acquired (for example, an effect that displays “bonus winning GET !!”) is not executed. Further, when the game is in a non-time-reduced game state and a special game is being executed, an effect (for example, “Left” The effect of displaying “Return to strike” is not executed. In addition, when the player enters the general winning opening P10 where the number of game balls that can be acquired at the time of executing the special game is increased, a special effect during the execution of the special game is executed. An effect that congratulates the winning (for example, an effect that displays “Bonus GET !!”) is executed. Further, when the game is in a non-time-reduced gaming state and the special game is not being executed, the game proceeds with a left-handed game, so that a right-handed game is executed and a game ball enters the general winning opening P10. Will determine that the game is not progressing normally, and execute an effect that prompts the player to stop making a right strike and perform a left strike (for example, an effect of displaying “Return to left strike”). . In addition, since the special game is not being executed, an effect that congratulates that the game ball has been acquired (for example, an effect that displays “bonus winning GET !!”) is not executed. In the eleventh embodiment, as a condition for generating an effect for encouraging left-handed play, one game ball is placed in the general winning opening P10 in a non-time-reduced game state and a special game is not being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are a plurality of game balls (for example, three balls) in the general winning opening P10 in a non-time-saving game state and a special game is not being executed. ) You may enter the ball. In such a configuration, during the execution of the effect that encourages left-handed, when the execution conditions of the effect that encourages left-handed again (for example, three balls entering the general winning opening P10) are satisfied, It may be configured to execute (re-execute) an effect that promotes left-handedness from the beginning.

  With the configuration as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, regarding the presence / absence of monitoring of the magnetic sensor installed in the vicinity of the prize winning opening, a period during which the solenoid is on and a predetermined period after the solenoid is turned off. (In this example, it is configured not to execute monitoring of the magnetic sensor J10 in the period until 1024 ms), and the closing period before and after the sorting game execution round is long (3200 ms in this example). By doing so, it will be possible to monitor the detection of unauthorized magnetism before and after the sorting game execution round, which is a round that has a large influence on the appearance, without detecting residual magnetism, and in an appropriate monitoring mode near the big prize opening The magnetic sensor J10 can be installed. In addition, when the right-handed game is executed, the game balls can be entered into the general winning opening P10, so that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the special game can be increased and the game situation can be increased. By configuring so that an effect executed when a game ball enters the general winning opening P10 can be different, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect related to the entering of the game ball into the general winning opening P10. .

  In the eleventh embodiment, if the game ball does not flow down toward the big prize opening (the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20) when right-handed is executed, the general prize is won. The game ball is configured to enter the mouth P10. However, as such a board surface configuration, a second main game start port B10 may be provided instead of the general winning port P10. In such a configuration, the second main game start opening B10 may be configured not to be provided with an electric accessory, and thus the second main game start opening during execution of the special game. A game ball can enter B10, and in the non-time-reduced game state, the first main game side wins a big game, a special game is executed, and after the special game ends, the time-shifted game state is entered and the right When the game is advanced by changing the second main game symbol by hitting (for example, another second main game start port is provided in the flow path of the game ball at the time of right hitting), the special game Since the second main game side hold can occur during the execution of the game, the second main game side hold is 0 after the special game ends, and the first main game side hold is 3 In spite of the time-saving gaming state, the first main gaming symbol starts to fluctuate It is possible to prevent the situation put away. Moreover, when comprised in that way, you may comprise so that another 1st main game start opening may be provided and an electrically-driven accessory may be provided in the said added 1st main game start opening.

In the eleventh embodiment, the effect executed when the player enters the general winning opening P10 is exemplified. However, in the board configuration as in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to enter the winning openings other than the general winning opening P10. An example of the effect aspect of the effect performed based on the entrance is illustrated below.
<When a game ball enters the first main game start opening A10>
(1) In the non-time-reduced gaming state, the performance is basically not executed, but excessive winnings (for example, 10 or more game balls enter in one second) or the first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s If a game ball stays above, an error display is executed. (2) In the time-saving gaming state, when a plurality of balls (for example, three balls) are entered, an effect that prompts the player to make a right strike is executed, and excessive winning (for example, 10 or more game balls enter in one second) When a game ball stays on the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, an error display is executed.
<When a game ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10>
(1) In the non-time-reduced gaming state, when a plurality of balls (for example, three balls) are entered, an effect is urged to make a left strike.
<When a game ball enters the second main game start opening B10>
(1) In the non-time-reduced gaming state, an error display is executed when one ball is entered (the effect of prompting left-handed is not executed). (2) In the time-reduced gaming state, when the game ball stays on the excessive winning (for example, 10 or more game balls entered per second) or the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s. Execute error display.

(Summary)
Note that the following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
It is a displaceable member provided in the variable winning opening, and it does not inhibit the entry position to the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) and the entry position to the specific area (for example, the specific area C22). A variable distribution member (for example, a shielding member C28) that is displaced to an uninhibited position,
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10),
A success / failure determination means for executing a determination of success / failure based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means;
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the determination of correctness by the correctness determination means;
The stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is a result of the determination of whether or not the determination is successful. Special game control means for executing a special game capable of executing a unit game that can be executed a plurality of times when it is stop identification information belonging to a specific group, which is advantageous to the player;
The gaming state relating to the ease of entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) is the normal gaming state and the starting port (for example, the first main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state. A game state transition control means that has a specific game state that makes it easy to enter the game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10), and that can be controlled to be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game;
When a special game is executed and there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22), a privilege granting control means capable of granting a privilege to the player is provided.
The specific group includes at least a specific group A and a specific group B different from the specific group A,
As the unit game, a distribution unit game that is a unit game in which the distribution variable member (for example, the shielding member C28) can be displaced to the non-inhibiting position can be executed a plurality of times.
The distribution variable member (for example, the shielding member C28) can be displaced to the non-inhibiting position when the game ball enters the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20). Whether or not the distribution variable member (for example, the shielding member C28) is displaced to the non-inhibiting position is determined depending on whether or not the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, It is configured to be determined based on the number of game balls that enter the two major winning openings C20),
A variable winning award in the distribution unit game being executed at the time of execution of all the distribution unit games in the special game executed when the stop identification information is the stop identification information belonging to the specific group A or the specific group B The distribution variable member (for example, the shielding member C28) is displaced to the non-inhibiting position when a predetermined number of game balls have entered the first grand prize winning opening C10 and the second big winning prize opening C20, for example. Configured,
In the special game executed when the stop identification information is the stop identification information belonging to the specific group B, at the time of execution of one or a plurality of distribution unit games, a variable winning slot (for example, The distribution variable member (for example, the shielding member C28) is displaced to the non-inhibiting position when a specific number of game balls have entered the first grand prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20). And
During the period in which the distribution variable member (for example, the shielding member C28) maintains the non-inhibiting position, the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening, etc.) C20) The variable prize opening in the currently executed allocation unit game is greater than the case where the distribution variable member (for example, the shielding member C28) is displaced to the non-inhibiting position when a predetermined number of game balls have entered into C20). When the distribution variable member (for example, the shielding member C28) is displaced to the non-inhibiting position when a specific number of game balls have entered the first grand prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20, for example. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to last longer.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
It is a displaceable member provided in the variable winning opening, and it does not inhibit the entry position to the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) and the entry position to the specific area (for example, the specific area C22). A variable distribution member (for example, the lower shielding member C25) that is displaced to the non-inhibiting position,
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first hold occurs. First random number temporary storage means;
A first game in which a determination is made based on the first random number relating to a certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information are determined based on the result of the determination Content determination means;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a stopped manner after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
Second game content determination means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the second random number, and determining a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the determination.
In accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means, control is performed so that the second identification information is stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a predetermined number of variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) A special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times so that a variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be made advantageous to the player until there is a winning ball or a predetermined period elapses. Is possible and
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, is there a specific number of balls entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20)? Alternatively, a variable winning opening opening game is executed in which a unit game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player is executed once until a specific period elapses. Special game control means that are possible,
When a variable prize opening game is executed and there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22), a privilege grant control means for granting a privilege to the player;
As a gaming state related to ease of entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the normal starting state and the second starting port (for example, the second main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state. A game state transition control means that has a specific game state that makes it easy to enter the game, and that can be controlled to enter the specific game state after completion of the execution of the special game,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is configured to be higher than the probability that the second identification information is not stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group.
The first identification information or the second identification information from the start of change display to the stop display as one unit, and in the case of a specific gaming state, after the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a predetermined number of times, it is assumed that the normal gaming state It is configured to be controllable,
The predetermined number of repetitions of the unit includes at least a predetermined number of times A and a predetermined number of times B that is different from the predetermined number of times A.
It is configured to be controllable so that it becomes a normal gaming state after the number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a specific number of times when it is in a specific gaming state from the start to the stop display of the second identification information as a unit. And
The specific number of repetitions of the unit includes at least a specific number of times A and a specific number of times B that is different from the specific number of times A.
The predetermined group includes at least a predetermined group A and a predetermined group B which is a group different from the predetermined group A,
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group A and the special gaming state is executed after the special game is executed, the first identification information or the second identification information Normal game after the number of repetitions from the start of variable display of the identification information to the stop display reaches the predetermined number A, or after the number of repetitions from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display reaches the specific number of times A Configured to be in a state,
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group B, the first identification information or the second Normal game after the number of repetitions from the start of variable display of the identification information to the stop display reaches the predetermined number B, or the number of repetitions from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display reaches the specific number of times B Configured to be in a state,
The first hold can be stored temporarily up to a certain number,
Subtracting the specific number A from the predetermined number A results in the constant number, subtracting the specific number B from the predetermined number B results in the constant number,
A pachinko gaming machine configured to be in a specific gaming state after the end of a special game executed after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3)
A first main game start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start opening (for example, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced in the open state, the second main game start A game ball can enter the mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball in the main game start port B10) in comparison with the inaccessible or open state of the game ball;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
It is a displaceable member provided in the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20), and inhibits the ball entering the specific area (for example, the specific area C22). A distribution variable member (for example, a shielding member C28) that is displaced to an inhibition position and a non-inhibition position that does not inhibit the entry into the specific area (for example, the specific area C22);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying the auxiliary game identification information;
An auxiliary game part (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
A first main game random number obtaining means for obtaining a first main game random number based on a ball entering the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port A10);
When the first main game random number is acquired by the first main game random number acquisition means, the acquired first main game random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first main game identification information is satisfied. And a first main game random number temporary storage means for controlling the first hold to occur,
Based on the first main game random number related to a certain first hold, the success / failure determination is executed, and the stop display mode of the first main game identification information and the variation of the first main game identification information based on the result of the determination First main game content determination means for determining a display mode;
According to the determination by the first main game content determination means, the first main game identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g) displays the first main game identification information in a variably displayed manner. First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display one main game identification information;
A second main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a second main game random number based on a ball entering the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10);
When the second main game random number is acquired by the second main game random number acquisition means, the acquired second main game random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the second main game identification information is satisfied. Then, a second main game random number temporary storage means for controlling the second hold to occur,
Based on the second main game random number related to a certain second hold, whether or not it is determined, and based on the result of the determination, the stop display mode of the second main game identification information and the variation of the second main game identification information Game content determination means for second main game for determining a display mode;
According to the determination by the second main game content determination means, the second main game identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) displays the second main game identification information in a variably displayed manner. Second main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the second main game identification information;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20, etc.) ) A unit game that can make a variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined number of balls in the player) or until a predetermined period elapses. A special game that is executed a plurality of times can be executed, and after the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second The variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) is made advantageous to the player until there is a specific number of balls in the big winning opening C20) or until a specific period elapses. Variable input to execute the unit game once to get And special game control means is capable of executing the mouth open game,
When a variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball entering a specific area, a bonus grant control means for granting a bonus to the player is provided,
If there is a second hold, the variable display start condition of the first main game identification information is not always satisfied, while the second main game identification information It is configured so that the variable display start condition can be satisfied,
When the game ball is continuously fired toward the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20), the first main gaming starting opening (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10). And a second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), and configured to allow a game ball to enter,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
After the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) based on the ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the auxiliary game identification information,
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the easy entry ball for executing the easy entry game that can change the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state. Game execution means;
As a game state relating to ease of entering the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), the normal game state and the second main game start port (for example, the first main game start port B10) 2 having a specific game state that makes it easy to enter the main game start opening B10), and easy entry game state control means that can be controlled to be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game,
The unit from the start of change display to the stop display of the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is taken as one unit, and when the unit is in a specific gaming state, it is set to the normal gaming state. Is configured to be controllable,
The first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the specific game state, and is configured to be in the specific game state after the end of the special game executed. Has been
The probability that the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the second main game identification information is not stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. Configured,
The probability that the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is selected as the stop display mode of the second main game identification information is configured to be higher than the probability that the specific mode is selected as the stop display mode of the auxiliary game identification information. And
In the specific game state, the auxiliary game identification information can be executed a plurality of times from the start of the variable display to the stop display in the period in which the first main game identification information is executed once from the start of the variable display to the stop display. This is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured as described above.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A specific area (for example, the specific area C12) in which a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C10) can enter;
It is a displaceable member provided in the variable winning a prize opening, and it does not inhibit the entrance position to the specific area (for example, the specific area C12) and the entrance position to the specific area (for example, the specific area C12). A variable distribution member (for example, a shielding member C28) that is displaced to an uninhibited position;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first hold occurs. First random number temporary storage means;
A first game in which a determination is made based on the first random number relating to a certain first hold, and a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information are determined based on the result of the determination Content determination means;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a stopped manner after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the second hold occurs. Second random number temporary storage means;
A second game in which a determination is made based on the second random number relating to a second hold, and a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information are determined based on the result of the determination. Content determination means;
In accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means, control is performed so that the second identification information is stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game advantageous to the player can be executed, and during the execution of the special game, a variable prize opening ( For example, it is possible to execute the first unit game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined number of balls in the big winning opening C10) or until a predetermined period elapses. Alternatively, after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, it is variable until there is a specific number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening C10) or the specific period elapses. A special game control means capable of executing a variable winning opening opening game that executes a second unit game once that can make a winning opening (for example, a big winning opening C10) advantageous to the player;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The variable display start condition of the second identification information can be satisfied even if the first identification information is in the variable display, and the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied even if the second identification information is in the variable display. Configured to be possible,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop where the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. Or the first identification information is configured not to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second identification information is configured to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group,
In the case of the high probability lottery state, the average value of the variation display period of the second identification information is shorter than the average value of the variation display period of the second identification information in the case of the low probability lottery state,
In the case of a high probability lottery state, when game balls are fired at a predetermined interval toward the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), the number of game balls fired per unit time is more than The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the variable prize opening opening game per unit time during the period when the special game is not executed is configured to be larger,
The distribution variable member (for example, the shielding member C28) can be displaced to the non-inhibiting position during execution of the first unit game and execution of the second unit game.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined group in the low probability lottery state, a special game is executed, and a specific area (for example, a specific area) is executed during the execution of the first unit game in the special game. When there is a ball entering the area C12), after the special game ends, the high probability lottery state is entered, while the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped in the specific group in the low probability lottery state. When the variable prize opening opening game is executed by being displayed, and there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C12) during execution of the second unit game in the variable prize opening opening game, It is configured to remain in the low-probability lottery state after the variable prize opening game ends.
The effect display contents displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) during the execution of the certain special game and during the execution of the certain variable prize opening game include special games and variable prize opening games. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is an effect display content that does not clearly notify which is being executed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (5)
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A first magnetic detection device (for example, a magnetic sensor J10) capable of detecting magnetism, disposed at a first distance away from a variable winning port (for example, a first grand prize port C10, a second grand prize port C20); ,
The second magnetism that can detect magnetism and is arranged at a position away from the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) by a second distance that is longer than the first distance. A detection device,
Variable prize opening driving means for displacing the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) from the closed state to the open state via an electromagnetic driving force;
When the first magnetic detection device (for example, magnetic sensor J10) and the second magnetic detection device detect magnetism during the monitoring effective period, a magnetic detection signal that is information indicating that the magnetism has been detected is sent to the main game unit side. Is configured to send to
When the first magnetic detection device (for example, the magnetic sensor J10) detects magnetism during the monitoring invalid period, the first magnetic detection device (for example, the main control board M) outputs a magnetic detection signal that is information indicating that the magnetism has been detected. ) Is configured not to send to
During the period in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) is displaced to the open state, the first magnetic detection device (for example, the magnetic sensor J10) is set as the monitoring invalid period. On the other hand, the second magnetic detection device is configured to have a monitoring validity period,
The first magnetic detection device (for example, the magnetic sensor J10) until the predetermined period elapses after the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) is displaced from the open state to the closed state. ) Is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured to have a monitoring invalid period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (6)
A main game start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a main game start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) that can be displaced in an open state or a closed state, When a game ball can enter the main game start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than the closed state, and is displaced into the closed state A variable member (for example, a structure in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter in the main game start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) as compared with the open state or the open state). , The second main game start opening electric accessory B11d),
A game entrance where a game ball can enter (for example, a general winning entrance P10),
A fixing member (for example, a ball entry adjusting member Y10) attached to the ball entrance (for example, a general game port P10) that reduces the ease of entering a game ball into the ball entrance (for example, the general game port P10). When,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the main game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying the auxiliary game identification information;
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering a main game start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10);
Main game content determination means for determining whether or not the main game is random and determining a stop display mode of the main game identification information and a variable display mode of the main game identification information based on the result of the determination When,
According to the determination by the main game content determination means, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) displays the main game identification information variably. Main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display of the main game identification information after,
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). Or a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous for the player until a predetermined period of time elapses,
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
After the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) based on the ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the auxiliary game identification information,
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the easy entry ball for executing the easy entry game that can change the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state. Game execution means;
A special game state having a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the main game start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10) than the normal game state. And easy entry game state control means that can be controlled to be in a specific game state after the execution of
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
As the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), at least a predetermined effect and a specific effect with different effect contents can be displayed.
When a game ball enters the entrance (for example, the general winning entrance P10) in a state where the normal game state is not being executed and the special game is not executed, the predetermined effect is not executed, and It is configured to execute the specific effect,
When a game ball enters a ball entrance (for example, a general winning port P10) in a situation where the game is in a normal game state and a special game is being executed, the predetermined effect is executed, and It is configured not to execute the specific performance,
In a situation where the game is in a specific game state, when a game ball enters a ball entrance (for example, a general winning port P10), the predetermined effect is not executed, and the specific effect is not executed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being.

M main control board,
MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP11t-C first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 first main game timer, MP11t-C2 second main game timer MP22t-B second main game Start-up electric accessory release timer, MP33c winning ball counter MP34t special game timer, MP51c probability variation counter MP52c hour and hour counter, MN52c limited frequency counter MP41t small hit game timer, MP41t-2 discharge waiting timer MP54t release timer, MP53c time Small-to-medium continuous counter MP52c-2 Second main game short-time counter A First main game peripheral device A10 (A10-2) First main game start port, A11s First main game start port entrance detection device A20 First main game Symbol display device, A21g first main game symbol display part A21 First main game symbol reservation display unit, B second main game peripherals A11-2d first main game start hole electric combination thereof,
A11-2s 1st main game start entrance ball detection device B10 2nd main game start entrance, B11s 2nd main game start entrance entrance detection device B11d 2nd main game start entrance electric accessory, B20 2nd main game symbol display Device B21g Second main game symbol display unit, B21h Second main game symbol hold display unit C First / second main game shared peripheral device, C10 First big prize port C11s First big prize port prize detection device, C11d first Grand prize opening electric appliance C20 2nd big prize opening, C21s 2nd big prize opening prize detection device C21d 2nd big prize opening electric machine, C22 (C12) specific area C13 1st big prize opening solenoid, C14 shielding member solenoid C23 2nd big prize exit discharge port, C23s 2nd big prize exit discharge detection device C24 upper shielding member, C25 lower shielding member, D30 game area C27 V prize opening, C27s V prize opening entrance detection device, 28 Shielding member C20-1 Box-shaped member, P10 General winning opening, P11s General winning opening detecting device H Auxiliary gaming peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary gaming starting opening H11s Auxiliary gaming starting entrance ball detecting device, H20 Auxiliary gaming symbol display device H21g Auxiliary Game symbol display part, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display part S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub main control board)
SM21t design variation time management timer, SM26c look-ahead effect execution counter SM23c stay stage management counter, SM23c2 consecutive resort count counter SM24t power-on timer SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decoration symbol display Area, SG12 first hold display portion SG13 second hold display portion, SB sub input button SBs sub input button input detection device, KH prize ball payout control board KE prize ball payout device, YG10 game ball, J10 magnetic sensor M10 magnet, N10 Maintenance nail, Y10 Entry adjustment member

Claims (1)

A main game start port where game balls can enter,
Auxiliary gaming start opening where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to the main game start opening and displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the main game start opening or compared with a closed state. A variable member that is easy to enter and is configured such that when it is displaced into the closed state, the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter in the main game start port,
An entrance where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the main game identification information;
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information;
Auxiliary game department that supports the main game,
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
A main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering the start gate for the main game;
Main game content determination means for determining whether or not the main game is random and determining a stop display mode of the main game identification information and a variable display mode of the main game identification information based on the result of the determination When,
Main game identification information display control for controlling the main game identification information to be stopped and displayed after the main game identification information is variably displayed on the main game identification information display unit according to the determination by the main game content determination means. Means,
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined number of balls in the variable winning opening or until a predetermined period elapses. Special game control means capable of executing a special game that can be in a state;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side to the sub-game unit side,
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game identification information display for controlling the auxiliary game identification information to be stopped and displayed after the auxiliary game identification information display section is variably displayed on the auxiliary game identification information display section based on the ball entering the auxiliary game start opening Control means;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, easy-entry game execution means for executing easy-entry game that can change the variable member from the closed state to the open state;
An easy-to-play ball game state that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the main game start port than the normal game state, and can be controlled to enter the specific game state after the execution of the special game Control means,
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
As the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit, at least a specific effect and a specific effect in which the effect content is different can be displayed.
A configuration in which the predetermined effect is not executed and the specific effect is executed when a game ball enters the entrance in a state where the game is in a normal game state and no special game is executed. Has been
A configuration in which the predetermined effect is executed and the specific effect is not executed when a game ball enters the entrance when the game is in a normal game state and a special game is being executed. Has been
In a situation where the game is in a specific game state, when a game ball enters the entrance, the predetermined effect is not executed, and the specific effect is not executed ,
When the specific effect is being executed based on the fact that the execution condition of the specific effect is satisfied by the entrance of the game ball into the entrance in a situation where the game is in a normal game state and no special game is executed. The execution of the specific effect is satisfied again when the game ball enters the entrance, and the specific effect is re-executed from the beginning. Pachinko machine.

Images